Operation Manual, User's Manual

ManualsBrandsSharp ManualsSolarLC32LE210EV

Functions of the machine and procedures

for placing originals and loading paper

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

COPIER

Using the copy function

PRINTER

Using the printer function

FACSIMILE

Using the fax function

SCANNER / INTERNET FAX

Using the scan / Internet fax function

DOCUMENT FILING

Storing jobs as files on the local drive

SETTING MODE

Configuring settings to make the

machine easier to use

Click to jump to the table of contents of the

desired chapter.

User's Manual

DIGITAL FULL COLOUR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MODEL: MX-7081

MX-8081

MANUAL FINISHING

Using the manual finishing function

Summary of content (918 pages)

PAGE 1
MODEL: MX-7081 MX-8081 DIGITAL FULL COLOUR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM User's Manual Click to jump to the table of contents of the desired chapter.
PAGE 2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view. The following explanation assumes that Adobe Acrobat Reader is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default state.). (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (4) Return to top page button (2) (5) Back one page button Title button Displays the page of the title indicated by the button. Displays the previous page.
PAGE 3
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL This manual explains how to use the MX-7081/MX-8081 digital full colour multifunctional system. Please note • For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide. • For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function. • The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows® 10.
PAGE 4
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BEFORE USING THE MACHINE User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 • User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 • Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 • Administration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 • Actions when the user is authenticated . . . . . . 1-47 PART NAMES AND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 • EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE LOADING PAPER SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144 • PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144 IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 • HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145 • When a large capacity tray is installed . . . . . . . 1-89 • SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146 • THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE . . . . 1-90 • SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE. .
PAGE 6
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PART NAMES AND FUNCTION EXTERIOR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (1) Output tray (centre tray)* (6) Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray. (2) Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off". ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10) (7) USB connector (A type) Keyboard* Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel.
PAGE 7
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE (12) (13) (15) (16) (14) (17) (12) Finisher* (19) (16) Bypass tray This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. ► FINISHER (page 1-135) Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" × 11"R, pull out the extension guide. ► LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-112) (13) Saddle stitch finisher* This staples and folds paper.
PAGE 8
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE (20) (21) (22) (23) (25) (20) Finisher (large stacker)* (24) (26) (27) (28) (29) (25) Trimming module* This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. ► FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-139) This trims the excess of saddle-stitched output. (26) Folding unit* This folds and outputs paper. (21) Saddle stitch finisher (large stacker)* (27) Curl correction unit* This staples and folds paper.
PAGE 9
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE INTERIOR (1) (5) (1) (2) (6) (7) Toner cartridge (6) (7) Transfer belt Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may cause a defective image. Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed. Paper reversing section cover (8) This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
PAGE 10
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed. ► CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER (page 1-182) (2) Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original. (3) (6) Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up.
PAGE 11
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE SIDE AND BACK (1) (2) (3) Facsimile expansion kit (Option) (4) (5) (6) (1) USB connector (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). (2) USB connector (B type) Cannot be used. (3) LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN cable.
PAGE 12
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE OPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. (1) (4) (5) (6) (2) (3) (7) (1) Main power indicator This lamp lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the " " position. ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10) (4) USB connector (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. Supports USB 2.
PAGE 13
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE TURNING ON THE POWER This section describes how to turn on/off the machine's power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel. Turning on the power • Turn the main power switch to the " " position. • When the main power indicator lights in green, press the [Power] button.
PAGE 14
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN HOME SCREEN Pressing the [Home Screen] key on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions. Displays the machine's status other than the job using icons. ► Icon indicating the status of the machine (page 1-12) Tap a mode to change to that mode. ►Changing mode from the mode display (page 1-13) Select shortcut keys for modes or functions.
PAGE 15
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Icon indicating the status of the machine Icon Machine status Icon Machine status Printer data is being processed. A USB device is installed. Printer data is being printed. The field support system is enabled. Send data exists. Single-byte alphanumeric character entry Forward error data exists. A data security kit is installed. Received data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 4) Received confidential fax data exists.
PAGE 16
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CHANGING MODES Changing mode from the Home screen Changing mode from the mode display Press the [Home Screen] key. Tap on the mode display.
PAGE 17
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PREVIEW SCREEN In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel.
PAGE 18
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Preview Setting Configure preview settings and settings such as specifying thumbnail view as the default setting for display of Document Filing and other files. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting]. Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown.
PAGE 19
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to delete, and tap . Erase Specified Range 2 Erase Specified Original Area Delete the Page Move the Page Rotate 180 Degrees Specify Chapter Inserts Insert Blank Page 1 2 3 4 5 5 Edit End • You can also delete the page by tapping [Delete the Page] on the action panel. • You can also delete the page by dragging a page to Select the location to move. .
PAGE 20
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Moving a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to move, and drag to move the page. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tap 3 of the destination. Tap the [Edit End] key. Rotating a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to rotate, and drag or to rotate the page.
PAGE 21
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Setting chapter inserts When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with 1 In the preview screen, tap to the first page. to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End Tap 3 . is displayed on the page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End • You can also set chapter inserts by tapping [Specify Chapter Inserts] on the action panel.
PAGE 22
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Inserting a blank page 1 2 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Select the location to insert blank page. 1 Tap , and tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page. Cancel and Return 2 3 4 5 4 Edit End You can also insert a blank page by tapping [Insert Blank Page] on the action panel. 3 Tap the [Edit End] key. Deleting part of the original image 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.
PAGE 23
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Erase Specified Range Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range. Exit Start Point X 53 Y 31 Height 31 Width 97 Clear Specify the erase range and then tap the [OK] key. OK Specify Range2 Specify Range3 Specify Range4 To delete the image outside the selected range, tap [Reverse Erase Range] on the action panel. 4 On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.
PAGE 24
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Eco ECO FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE These functions help save power consumption by managing operations of sections prone to high power consumption. The machine provides two power-saving modes. Function Description Page AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF MODE If no operations take place, this mode will turn off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state.
PAGE 25
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Mode Settings The eco function settings are set in a batch. "Custom Mode" and "Eco Mode" are available. Setting values applied by each mode is as follows. Function Custom Mode Eco Mode Preheat Mode Setting 1min. 1min. Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat mode On On Auto Power Shut-Off Timer Fix transition time.: 11min. (for Europe) 15min. (Except for Europe) Fix transition time.: 1min.
PAGE 26
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PREHEAT MODE This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode, the amount of energy saved is less and the wakeup time is shorter. In the preheat mode, the [Home Screen] key is lit and the light goes off for the touch panel and the [Power Save] button.
PAGE 27
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Change transition time by time of day. This function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period. When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time.] option is disabled. • The image transfer control settings are not changed. • This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling.
PAGE 28
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Sleep Mode Power Level Low Power: The machine switches to the power saving mode, but it takes some time to recover. Fast Wake Up: Compared with Low Power, the power value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster recovery. ECO SCAN Non-print jobs such as sending a scanned original are performed with the fusing unit turned off.
PAGE 29
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Energy Saving Pattern List This function analyzes machine usage and controls entry into auto power shutoff mode based on frequency of use. If you want to manage machine power by using an energy saving pattern list, select [Manual] in "Settings (administrator)" - [Eco Setting] - [Energy Save] - [Change transition time by time of day.], and select an Automatic Update Pattern from the pull-down list or one of Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4.
PAGE 30
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting The machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The "Setting 1", "Setting 2" and "Setting 3" are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the same clock time.
PAGE 31
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Specific Date Operation Settings You can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date. "Specific Date" tab A period of up to 7 days can be set for Specific Date. Set the specific date, energy saving pattern to be applied, and the operation that takes place if the specific date falls on a non-work day.
PAGE 32
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE DISPLAYING ECO RECOMMENDATION SETTINGS (ECO RECOMMENDATION FUNCTION DISPLAY) When the base screen of normal mode is displayed, eco recommendation settings appear. This function does not operate in easy mode. To use the eco recommendation function display: "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Recommendation Function Display]. The displayed functions are as follows.
PAGE 33
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE USER AUTHENTICATION User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace. When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine. There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
PAGE 34
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 2 Tap the [OK] key. (1) User Authentication Enter your user number. 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
PAGE 35
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears. User Authentication Enter login name and password.
PAGE 36
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 1 Enter the login name. User Authentication Entering using the soft keyboard If user name registration has not been performed in setting mode, a user only using LDAP authentication should tap the [Login Name] text box and enter the login name using the soft keyboard. Selecting from a list Tap the [Select from List] key and select a user name from the User List screen. Enter login name and password.
PAGE 37
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Tap the [OK] key. User Authentication If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. Enter login name and password.
PAGE 38
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE QUICK AUTHENTICATION When operating the machine, this enables easy authentication by tapping a preconfigured icon. • Up to 20 users can be registered. • Only the machine supports quick authentication. Web page authentication and authentication from a printer driver cannot be used. To use web page authentication and authentication from a printer driver, enter Login Name/Password to authenticate.
PAGE 39
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Easy Copy Easy Fax LINE Easy Scan Job Status Change icon(s) Register User Name Registration PRINTER Enter user information, and tap the [Register] key. Specify the user icon, Login Name, E-mail Address, Password, and Password (confirmation). Tap the items to register, and enter necessary details. • Tap "Change icon(s)" on the action panel, and the icon selection screen appears. Select the desired icon to configure.
PAGE 40
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Easy Copy Easy Scan LINE File Retrieve PRINTER Sharp OSA Job Status 10:15 Easy Copy Toner Quantity Bk C M Y Easy Scan Operation Guide Tray Settings Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Sharp OSA Brightness Adjustment Job Status 1-37 When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout].
PAGE 41
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE User Control You can perform user management such as registering login users and specifying the user authentication method. In [User Control] of "Settings (administrator)" and [Authentication Settings] of [System Settings]. User List This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled. • [Add] key Adds a new user. • [Delete All Users] key Deletes all registered users. (Excluding users stored as factory default.
PAGE 42
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Users stored as factory default The following users are stored in the machine at the factory. • Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default. • System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This account cannot execute jobs. • User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly.
PAGE 43
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Settings Item Description User Name Store a user name consisting of up to 255 characters. This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. Apply User Name to Log-in Name.*1 Select this Initial (Optional) This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Enter a maximum of 10 characters for the initials. Index Select a custom index to be stored.
PAGE 44
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Custom Index You can change the custom index name. Tap the custom index name on the list to edit it. Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters). Organization /Group List This is used to store user groups. Tap each group name to enter them directly. User Information Print Prints the following item lists.
PAGE 45
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Default Settings This section describes of "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Authentication Settings] → [Default Settings]. User Authentication This setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method. When the user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, the separate authentication settings apply to the user.
PAGE 46
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Specify network server access control Register the access control information for page count limits, authorities, and favourite operations can be registered on a network server in advance. By using this network server for network authentication, perform the user authentication based on the registered access control information.
PAGE 47
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE If 1000 users have already been manually registered, login will not be possible. Please delete old or unused user name. Consult the administrator of the machine. • If Access Control is enabled and the access control information cannot be acquired from the authentication server, user authentication will not be possible.
PAGE 48
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Case sensitivity of login name is enabled. Set whether or not to make login names used at the time of user authentication case sensitive. If the checkbox is set to , login names with identical spelling but different cases (upper and lower) will be identified as different login names. Therefore, login names with identical spelling but different cases will be authenticated as user names of different users.
PAGE 49
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Cache Authentication Information for External Service Connect Set whether or not authentication information for connection to the cloud is retained as cache information. When this setting is enabled, the authentication information of a successfully authenticated user is retained to enable smooth authentication when the user subsequently logs in.
PAGE 50
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Allow Remote Scanner Using Before Login. This setting specifies whether scanning can be performed by remote operation before a user has logged in. Include Job Status in user authentication When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to include the job status in user authentication. Enable IPP Authentication Except for Printer Driver. Enable IPP authentication for other than the printer driver.
PAGE 51
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Card Reader Settings Card Scan Test Execute the scan test of the card to be used. Card ID Registration/Change Authority This setting specifies whether the logged-in user can register/change/delete the card ID information on the machine. Check System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode Check the System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode. Check Facility Code in HID mode This setting specifies whether or not to check facility code when you use HID mode.
PAGE 52
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Pages Limit Group This section describes of "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Access Control Settings] → [Pages Limit Group]. This is used to register the page limit settings in advance for each group. The page limit for each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List This shows the currently stored groups.
PAGE 53
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Authority Group This section describes of "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Access Control Settings] → [Authority Group]. This is used to store the settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List This shows the currently stored groups.
PAGE 54
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Item Description Sending while printing Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Creation of PDF for PC Browsing Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Approval Setting to Use Toner Save Mode No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save All allowed All prohibited All allowed All allowed All allowed All prohibited Colour Scan Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Proh
PAGE 55
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Item Description Sharp OSA Approval Setting to Use a Sharp OSA Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed Change Billing Code Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Output Approval Settings All allowed All prohibited All allowed All prohibited All prohibited All allowed Document Filing Approval Setting: Q
PAGE 56
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Item * Description Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (Admin) Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (User) Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Metadata Entry Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Document Filing Settings Allowed* Allowed* Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Sharp OSA Settings Allowed Al
PAGE 57
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Favourite Operation Group Favourite Operation Group List This section describes of "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Access Control Settings] → [Favourite Operation Group]. The preferred operation environment can be set for each group.
PAGE 58
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Item Description Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch Select a time when a long key touch is detected. Double Tap Interval Setting Select an interval when a double tap is detected. Keys Touch Sound Set the sound made when keys are touched. Keyboard Select Set the language that appears on the keyboard. MFP Display Pattern Setting Select the colour pattern used in the touch panel.
PAGE 59
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Home Screen List Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List. Item Description Name Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name. Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied.
PAGE 60
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Resetting user counts Select a user in the setting screen and tap the [Clear Count] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear. The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in each case are described in the table below. When a single user is selected Item Description Next Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).
PAGE 61
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ACTIVE DIRECTORY LINKING FUNCTION You can join the Active Directory domain (AD domain) of the machine, and easily perform user management on the network. On a network that does not have Active Directory enabled, you must perform network device authentication for each device. For this reason, one user must have multiple domain names and passwords. When you join an AD domain, you only need to be authenticated once.
PAGE 62
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE User authentication in the AD domain The following methods can be used for user authentication in the AD domain. 1. Authentication by manual entry on the machine Perform authentication using the touch panel of the machine. For the authentication method, refer to "AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD (page 1-32)". Configure the following setting in "Settings (administrator)".
PAGE 63
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Functions that can be used by linking with Active Directory User accessible network folders When a user who has logged in to the AD domain accesses a network folder from the machine, the user can only access a folder for which he has permission. Shared folder When a logged in user taps the [Browse] key for a shared folder address, only folders for which the user has permission are displayed.
PAGE 64
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Active Directory Settings Among the items that must be set to use Active Directory on the machine, this section explains those items that can be set in the Active Directory settings of the System Settings. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Active Directory Settings]. Search Attribute: Set the lookup attribute. The default setting is cn.
PAGE 65
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BILLING CODE BILLING CODE A billing code, which is added to a recorded job log when a printing or sending job has been executed, is used to perform billing processing. Billing codes are classified into two types: main code and sub code. A billing code is recorded in the job log when it is entered and a print or send job is executed.
PAGE 66
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE USE BILLING CODE If the use of billing code is enabled in "Settings (administrator)", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode). Enter the main code or sub code as required. • To enable use of the billing code Select "Settings (administrator)" → [User Control] → [Billing Code Setting] → [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].
PAGE 67
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 2 OK Select Billing Code Cancel and Return Add/Edit Billing Code Main Code Main Code Name MAIN001 Company 1 MAIN002 Company 2 MAIN003 Company 3 MAIN004 Company 4 MAIN005 Company 5 MAIN006 Company 6 MAIN007 Company 7 MAIN008 Company 8 Tap and select the main code from the list. CA To search for the main code or main code name Tap .
PAGE 68
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Directly entering a billing code 1 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the box in [Main Code], then enter the main code. Billing Code Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Select from List Sub Code AAAA Select from List CA Bypass Billing Code Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. OK When not specifying a billing code Tap the [Bypass Billing Code] key. The use code is set to the main code.
PAGE 69
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE Register a new billing code. A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Settings". To register a billing code from Setting Mode Select "Settings" → [User Control] → [Billing Code Setting] → [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List]. A total of up to 2000 main and sub codes can be registered.
PAGE 70
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Main Code Tap [Add New] on the action panel. Add New Main Code Registration Main Code Name CA To return to the billing code selection window Tap . 4 (4) Tap the box of [Main Code], then type in the main code. Cancel and Return Main Code Registration Main Code End Registration Main Code Name Register Next Billing Code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.
PAGE 71
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 7 Designate Public Address (Selected:1/32) Tap and select a group as a public destination Clear Organization /Group List Group 1 Up to eight groups can be specified. After the settings are completed, tap . Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 CA Group 7 Group 8 To cancel the setting Tap [Clear] on the action panel. This cancels the registered public destination and returns the screen to the previous window.
PAGE 72
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE You can change or delete the registered billing code. The billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Settings". To edit or register a billing code from Setting mode Select "Settings" → [User Control] → [Billing Code Setting] → [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Edit or register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List]. Editing a billing code 1 Please enter Billing Code.
PAGE 73
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 4 Main Code AAAA Main Code Name AAAA Available to Edit the main code as required. Cancel and Return Main Code Registration For information on how to correct the code, refer to steps 4 to 7 in "REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE (page 1-66)". End Registration Register Next Billing Code. Public to All Specify target public address CA 5 Tap [End Registration] on the action panel.
PAGE 74
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a billing code 1 Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Select from List Sub Code AAAA Select from List CA 2 3 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. Billing Code Bypass Billing Code OK OK Select Billing Code To delete a sub code, tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code. The subsequent steps are the same as the main code.
PAGE 75
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Billing Code Setting Configure settings for the Billing Code Setting In "Settings (administrator)" → [User Control] → [Billing Code Setting]. Administration Settings Change the billing code setting. Use Billing Code Switch whether to enable or disable a billing code. Default Code Setting A use code is automatically assigned when no billing code is entered. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.
PAGE 76
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Correct a main code Selecting a main code from the list displays the window to correct the main code. For information on the settings, see "Settings (page 1-73)". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit] key; you can apply the corrected contents and complete processing. Search for a main code Enter the main code and main code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed.
PAGE 77
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Settings Item Description Sub Code Enter the sub code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. Sub Code Name Enter the sub code. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters. Available to The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group. When not specifying a public destination, select [All Users]. When specifying a public destination, select [Designate Public Address.
PAGE 78
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE EASILY CONNECT WITH AN NFC-COMPATIBLE MOBILE DEVICE (EASY CONNECT) You can easily connect the machine to a smartphone or other NFC compatible mobile device. • Touch the NFC touch point area in the lower right corner of the operation panel. ► OPERATION PANEL (page 1-9) • An NFC card reader must be connected to the machine.
PAGE 79
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CONNECTING BY QR CODE You can connect by displaying the QR code on the machine's touch panel and then having your mobile device (with the dedicated application already installed) read the QR code. The machine sends the information required for connection to the mobile device, and the information is saved. No settings are required on the mobile device, and setup is quickly accomplished.
PAGE 80
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Easy Connection Setting Set this option to use Easy Connection Setting. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Easy Connection Setting]. NFC This appears when an NFC card reader is connected. Enable this setting to connect to mobile devices using an NFC card reader.
PAGE 81
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE NAS NAS (Network Attached Storage) is a storage device that is connected to the network. You can use part of the machine’s local drive area as a simple file server to save files and browse saved files. Folder structure The folder structure is as follows. public root shared faxreceive • root • public: Area for storing PDF files for PC browsing that have been created using the document filing function. • shared: Area where you can freely create folders.
PAGE 82
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Saving files in NAS / browsing NAS files 1 You can save data that you need to the machine’s local drive, and view the data on your computer. Document scanned on the machine In document filing, tap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox so that it is selected , and copy to the public folder to save the data.
PAGE 83
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Remotely operate the machine on your computer. You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine's operation panel that is displayed on your PC, with the same feel as operating in front of the machine. The machine Your computer Operation panel Operate the machine using your computer screen. Network The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.
PAGE 84
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Example: RealVNC Start the VNC viewer, enter the IP address of the machine in the "VNC Server" entry box, and click the [Connect] button. 1 Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address. 2 Follow the message on the operation panel of the machine to permit the connection. When the machine is connected to a VNC application software, appears on the system bar of the machine's touch panel.
PAGE 85
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE The structure of the machine and the software are designed to allow all people to use the machine with ease. UNIVERSAL DESIGN RELATED TO OPERATION Adjustment of operation panel angle The angle of the entire operation panel can be adjusted to enable use even when seated. Grip handle on paper trays The grip-type handles allow easy use from above or below.
PAGE 86
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Confirmation of placement of original in document feeder You can use the original setting indicator to check if an original has been correctly placed in the auto document feeder. Select "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Status Indicator Setting] → [Use Original Detection Light for Document Feeder]].
PAGE 87
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES The machine has design features and settings that are compatible with universal design. Easy-to-use user interface • Easy mode This mode shows only frequently used items. Buttons and text are enlarged to increase ease of operation. Almost all regular operations can be completed using the easy mode screen.
PAGE 88
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Intuitive operation • Quick-view operation guide Touch the [Operation Guide] key in the home screen on the touch panel to display the operation guide. The operation guide provides simple explanations of how to use the machine. • Easy operation by storing programs The program function lets you store groups of settings for copying, fax, and other functions. By storing groups of settings that you frequently use, you can easily select those settings.
PAGE 89
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG The machine records the performed jobs in the job log. The main information recorded in the job log is described below. • To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
PAGE 90
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE No. Item name Description Number of Reserved Pages Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded. 21 Number of Completed Pages Number of completed pages of a set is recorded. 22 Result The result of a job is recorded. 23 Error Cause When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded. Output The output mode of a printed job is recorded. 25 Staple The status of stapling is recorded.
PAGE 91
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE No. 49 Item name Colour Setting Colour mode selected by user is recorded. 50 Special Modes Special modes selected when the job was executed is recorded. 51 File Name The stored file name is recorded.* 52 Data Size [KB] The size of a file is recorded. Original Size Size of scanned original is recorded. For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file is recorded. 54 Original Type Original type (text, printed photo, etc.
PAGE 92
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER When a large capacity tray is installed Tray 2 Bypass Tray Tray 1 Tray 5 Tray 3 Tray 4 When large capacity trays are installed Tray 1 Tray 2 Bypass Tray Tray 5 Tray 6 Tray 3 Tray 4 1-89
PAGE 93
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE To indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings.
PAGE 94
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media. • Various types of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
PAGE 95
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Types of paper that can be set in each tray Tray 1/2 Thin paper Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray Tray 5 Large capacity tray (MX-LC12/ MX-LCX3 N) Large capacity trays Tray 5 Tray 6 Bypass tray (for large capacity trays) Inserter (Upper / Lower) - - - Yes - Yes Yes Yes - Plain paper 1 (60 to 89 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs bond)) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Plain paper 2 (90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ye
PAGE 96
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Setting orientation of the print side The setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper in the reverse orientation. Place with the print side facing the direction indicated below.
PAGE 97
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY 1/2 A maximum of 1200 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 1. A maximum of 800 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 2. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings (administrator)". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.
PAGE 98
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 3 Indicator line Lift the feed roller, and place paper into the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1200 sheets for tray 1, or maximum of 800 sheets for tray 2). Indicator line Lower the feed roller, and gently push the paper tray into the machine. 4 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds.
PAGE 99
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 2 Attach the paper size guide and transparent sheet appropriately for the size of paper to be used. (1) LT A4 (1) Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the appropriate slot on the base of the tray. (2) Align the paper size guide with the slot for the paper size to be used (indicated by the paper size mark). A4 LT (2) Align the holes at the top of the paper size guide with the protrusions that secure the paper size guide.
PAGE 100
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY 3/4 A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from A3W to B5R (12" × 18" to 7-1/4" × 10-1/2"R) can be loaded into tray 3. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from A3W wide to A5R (12" × 18" to 5-1/2" × 8-1/2"R) can be loaded into tray 4. • Other than plain paper, special media such as transparency film and tab paper can be loaded into tray 4. To load tab paper, the dedicated guide must be installed.
PAGE 101
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Fan the paper. 3 4 Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed. Insert the paper into the tray. Indicator line Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets). Gently push the paper tray into the machine. 5 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly.
PAGE 102
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading tab paper into tray 4 1 Remove the tab paper guide. 2 Pull out the tray and install the guide. 3 Insert the tab paper into the tray. The guide is stored inside tray 4. Adjust the guide plates to the triangle mark position. Install the guide so that it may cover the guide plates. Adjust the guide plates in the tray to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded.
PAGE 103
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper. Originals Tab paper Top edge ABC DEF Side 1 1st page GHI JKL Tail edge 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 4th page 4 3rd page 2nd page Gently push the tray into the machine, and set the paper type to tab paper. Using "Paper Tray Settings" in the system settings, set the paper type to tab paper.
PAGE 104
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading envelope in tray 4 Load the paper with the copy and print side facing up. The diagram shows an example of printing on the front side. The maximum number of sheets (50) may not exceed the indicator line. Envelopes with triangular flaps cannot be used in tray 4. Depending on the countries or regions, envelopes may not be available.
PAGE 105
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE CAPACITY TRAY Use the large capacity tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray. • Large capacity tray (MX-LC12) stores a maximum of 3500 sheets of A4, B5 and 8-1/2" × 11" paper. • Large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N) stores a maximum of 3000 sheets of paper from A3W (12" × 18") to B5 (8-1/2" × 11"R), SRA3 and SRA4. When changing the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
PAGE 106
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Gently push the paper tray into the machine. 4 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds. Large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N) Press the operation button. 1 The operation button blinks, and the tray paper table goes down to the paper loading position. Wait until the operation button light goes off. Do not pull out the tray until the light goes off.
PAGE 107
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER • Do not insert your hand into the space inside the paper table when you load paper. • Do not insert spare paper or objects into the space inside the tray. 5 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds. The paper table goes up after the tray is pushed in. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes up.
PAGE 108
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Changing the paper size for the large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N) Loosen the paper guide screw. 1 Plate 2 Slide the plate of the paper guide. Slide the plate until the red line appears at the centre of the size window of the plate. Adjust the paper guide to the paper size that will be used. 3 Slide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of the plate. 4 (1) Secure the paper guide.
PAGE 109
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Change the right paper guide to the paper size to be used. 6 (1) While holding up the paper guide lock, slide the paper guide to the paper size to be used. (2) Release the paper guide lock. (3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right and left so that it locks into place. You will hear a "click" when the paper guide locks. 7 Set the paper size and paper type.
PAGE 110
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS Use the large capacity trays for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray. The large capacity trays store a maximum of 5000 sheets of paper (2500 sheets for tray 5 and 2500 sheets for tray 6) from A3W (12" × 18") to B5R (7-1/4" × 10-1/2"R). Other than plain paper, special media such as tab paper and transparency film can be loaded into the large capacity trays.
PAGE 111
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 3 Fan the paper. 4 Load the paper. Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed. Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 2500 sheets). Indicator line 5 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly.
PAGE 112
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading the tab paper 1 Remove the tab paper guide. 2 Insert the tab paper into the tray. The guide is stored in the upper tray. Place the tab paper with the print side facing up so that the tab is to the right. See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper.
PAGE 113
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Place the tab paper guide. 3 4 Place the guide on the top of the tab paper. Gently push the tray into the machine, and set the paper type to tab paper. Using "Paper Tray Settings" in the system settings, set the paper type to tab paper. To set the paper type to tab paper: Set this in [Tray Settings] in the home screen or in "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings].
PAGE 114
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Adjust the paper guide to the paper size that will be used. 3 Slide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of the plate. Both near and far plates slides when you slide one of those. 4 Secure the paper guide. (1) (1) Slide the plate of the paper guide. Slide the plate until the paper size to be used appears in the size window of the plate.
PAGE 115
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. A maximum of 100 sheets of paper can be loaded into the bypass tray (on the machine), or a maximum of 500 sheets can be loaded in the bypass tray (on the large capacity trays), and continuous printing is possible as is the case with other trays.
PAGE 116
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading tab paper When printing on tab paper, be sure to place the paper with the print side facing down. For the bypass tray (on the large capacity trays), the dedicated guide must be installed in the bypass tray guides at the rear end. The dedicated guide is in the upper side of the large capacity trays. Bypass tray (on the machine) Bypass tray (on the large capacity trays) Side 2 Side 2 Left Place the first sheet of tab paper so that the tab faces toward you.
PAGE 117
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading envelopes When loading envelopes into the bypass tray, place them in the orientation as shown in the figure. Placing envelopes Only the front side of envelopes can be printed on or copied to. Place the front side facing down. When placing DL • Open the flap of the envelope. • Place so that the flap is on the right. When placing C4, C5, or C6 • Close the flap of the envelope. • Place so that the flap is on the back side.
PAGE 118
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Important points when using envelopes • Do not print the rear surface (the side with adhesive) of the envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality. • Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician. • Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure. • Fold the flap of the envelope and make a sharp crease at the fold.
PAGE 119
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Important points when using embossed paper/label sheets • The effect of asperity surfaces of embossed paper may affect the print quality depending on the type of embossed paper. For more information, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative. • Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions.
PAGE 120
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading paper into the bypass tray (on the machine) Open the bypass tray. 1 When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" × 11"R, pull out the extension guide. Pull the bypass tray extension all the way out. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray. 2 Adjust the bypass tray guides to the size of paper to be loaded. 3 Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops.
PAGE 121
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading paper into the bypass tray (on the large capacity trays) To replace the paper in the bypass tray, press the operation button and remove the paper. 1 The paper table goes down. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes down. The button lights up when the paper table has gone down. Do not remove the paper until the button ceases blinking. Adjust the bypass tray guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
PAGE 122
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 4 Press the operation button. The paper table goes up. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes up. The button lights up when the paper table has gone up.
PAGE 123
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. 1 Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. 2 Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray. 3 Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray. 4 Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray.
PAGE 124
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER PAPER SETTINGS IN THE SYSTEM SETTINGS You can configure detailed settings such as the size and type of paper in a tray. In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings]. Paper Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray.
PAGE 125
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Tray Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Size Tray 1 Plain Paper 1 to 2*1, Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, User Type A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11" Tray 2 Plain Paper 1 to 2*1, Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, User Type A4, 8-1/2" x 11" Tray 3 Plain Paper 1 to 2*1, Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Heavy Paper 1 to 4*2, User Type Auto-AB (A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 216 x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")), Au
PAGE 126
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Paper Tray Paper Type 2*1, Bypass tray (on the machine) Plain Paper 1 to Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Thin Paper, Heavy Paper 1 to 4*2, Embossed, Envelope, Tab Paper, Transparencies, Labels, Glossy Paper, User Type Inserter (Upper tray) Inserter (Lower tray) Auto-AB (SRA3, A3W, A3, B4, SRA4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 13" x 19", 11" x 17", 216 x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"), 216 x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), 216 x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 8-1/2
PAGE 127
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Select Paper Sizes for Auto Detection "Select Paper Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is automatically detected from similar sizes when the automatic paper size detection takes place. Select one of two sizes when "Auto-Inch" is set. Select one of five sizes when "Auto-AB" is set.
PAGE 128
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Place the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original. To place it in the automatic document feeder, see "AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127)".
PAGE 129
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Original Feeding Mode The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to local drive. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it. • Mixed Size Doc. Different Width • Slow Scan Mode • Blank Page Skip* * Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode.
PAGE 130
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder. • Place originals of different sizes together, if needed, in the automatic document feeder. In that case, use the "Others" function in each mode to set [Mixed Size Original]. An original cannot be detected if all pages are of the same size but some of them are set in a different orientation.
PAGE 131
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Allowed original sizes Minimum original size Standard size (Minimum size that can be automatically detected) 148 mm (longitudinal) × 210 mm (transversal) or A5 5-1/2" (longitudinal) × 8-1/2" (transversal) Non-standard size (Minimum size that can be specified manually) 131 mm (longitudinal) × 140 mm (transversal) 5-1/8" (longitudinal) × 5-1/2" (transversal) Business card: 51 mm x 89 mm to 55 mm x 91 mm Maximum original size Standard size (Maximum size that
PAGE 132
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL 1 Make sure that there is no original on the document glass. Place the original. 2 Below the indicator line Align the edges evenly Up to 300 sheets can be inserted. and face them up After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, Insert to the end remove originals from the original exit tray.
PAGE 133
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL PREVENTIVE LIGHT TO INDICATE ORIGINAL LEFT BEHIND In order to prevent originals being left behind, the automatic document feeder incorporates a lamp on the top of the original exit tray. This lamp detects a document on the automatic document feeder, and starts blinking after the last original is output from the original exit tray. Light turning off The preventive light to indicate original left behind will turn off in the event of the following.
PAGE 134
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT GLASS This section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass. • Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it. • Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 135
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL 3 Close the automatic document feeder. After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner. • When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it. • If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or paste up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies.
PAGE 136
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality. The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment. (As of March, 2020) Product name Large capacity tray Product number Description MX-LC12 Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be placed. MX-LCX3 N Additional tray.
PAGE 137
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Product name Product number Description Inserter MX-CF11 This unit inserts covers and insertion sheets. This unit can also feed paper to a finisher (MX-FN21) or saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN22) for finishing. Curl correction unit MX-RB27 This unit corrects curls in printed paper. This unit is required for installing a finisher (MX-FN21), saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN22), folding unit or inserter.
PAGE 138
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (2) (5) (3) (4) (6) (1) Output tray (upper tray) The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 paper, extend the tray. (2) Output tray (lower tray) Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.
PAGE 139
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
PAGE 140
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the front cover. 2 Remove the staple case.
PAGE 141
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. 6 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 142
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper and the staple sort function that staples each set of prints. Installing an optional hole punch module allows you to punch holes in printed paper. PART NAMES (1) (4) (2) (3) (1) Staple compiler (3) Output paper that will not be offset in this tray. The tray is slidable.
PAGE 143
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 REPLACING THE CARTRIDGE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out.
PAGE 144
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 5 Install a staple case. 6 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 145
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING STAPLE WASTE When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced. The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box. Follow the steps below to discard staple waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple waste. • Do not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers. • Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag.
PAGE 146
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover.
PAGE 147
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
PAGE 148
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
PAGE 149
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx.
PAGE 150
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge (finisher unit) 1 Open the front upper cover. 2 Remove the staple case. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
PAGE 151
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 6 Close the front upper cover. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher. Do not replace removed output back in the output tray. 1 Open the front upper cover. 2 Slowly pull out the front lower cover until it stops.
PAGE 152
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Remove the staple case. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Replace both staple cartridges. 6 Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
PAGE 153
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Push the front lower cover back in. 8 Close the front upper cover. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 154
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This includes the offset function that outputs sorted sheets of paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. Installing an optional hole punch module allows you to punch holes in printed paper.
PAGE 155
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x four cartridges) MX-SCX1 REPLACING THE CARTRIDGE Finisher unit When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
PAGE 156
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 2 Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 5 Install a staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
PAGE 157
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front cover. 6 Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Saddle stitch unit When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher (Large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray.
PAGE 158
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case. 3 Pull the staple case out to the left. Replace both staple cartridges. 4 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. Press the lock button to open the release lever. 6 Install a new staple cartridge. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
PAGE 159
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 8 Push the staple case firmly back in. 9 Push the saddle stitch unit in. 10 Align of the staple case with of the unit. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 160
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING STAPLE WASTE When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced. The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box. Follow the steps below to discard staple waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple waste. • Do not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers. • Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag.
PAGE 161
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING PAPER WASTE When folded paper is trimmed in trimmer settings, paper waste is generated. Paper waste is collected in the paper waste box. Follow the operation procedure to remove paper waste. Using the trimmer function trims a side drop at the time of folding, creating a neat finish. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the paper waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the paper waste.
PAGE 162
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover.
PAGE 163
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN16B/C/D) The punch module can be installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. A finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required to install the punch module (large stacker). DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste. 1 Open the front cover.
PAGE 164
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover.
PAGE 165
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN13A/B/C/D) The punch module can be installed on a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to punch holes in paper to be output. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to install the punch module (large stacker). DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste.
PAGE 166
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Gently push the box back in. 4 Close the front cover.
PAGE 167
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FOLDING UNIT A folding unit can be used for Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, and Half Fold. A finisher (Large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (Large stacker) is required to install the folding unit. PART NAMES (1) (2) (3) (1) Top cover (3) Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. (2) Output tray of folding unit Folded output is delivered to this tray. Bottom cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
PAGE 168
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES INSERTER Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to staple, punch or fold the paper. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the inserter, see the "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Start Guide".
PAGE 169
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES STATUS INDICATORS These indicators show the status of the machine. The green indicator lights up or blinks according to the job status of the machine. The red indicator lights up or blinks when an error occurs. It lights up when an error occurs but the machine is still able to be used, and blinks when the machine is not able to be used due to an error. In setting mode, you can change the operation settings for the status indicators.
PAGE 170
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Sharp OSA Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that directly links the machine to software applications for work (external applications) over a network. When you use a machine that supports Sharp OSA, you can link controls on the operation panel and device functions such as scan send to external applications. APPLICATION COMMUNICATION This module enables you to link the machine with a scanner application and other standard applications.
PAGE 171
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES EXTERNAL ACCOUNT APPLICATION The external account module enables you to use an "external account application" for centralized account management of an MFP on a network. An "external account application" can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When "external authentication mode" is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.
PAGE 172
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES External count mode Unlike in external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the external account application is not displayed after the machine has started up. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled.
PAGE 173
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Sharp OSA Settings In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings]. Condition Settings Sharp OSA version Displays Sharp OSA version supported by this machine. Cookie Setting Specify how application cookies are handled when using an application in Sharp OSA. When "Hold Cookie" is selected, the machine holds cookies that are used in an application. When "Not hold Cookie" is selected, cookies are not held when an application is used.
PAGE 174
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Settings Item Settings Application Name Enter an application name. Address for Application UI Set an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. Extended Platform Set this option to use the expansion platform. Data Size Set the screen size of application. Use Custom Icon* Select whether or not custom icon is used. File Name* Reports file name.
PAGE 175
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES External Accounting Application Settings An external account application can be added and controlled. Set the server name where you have installed the external accounting application. The external account module is required. Item Settings Server 1-4 Set to enable each of the servers. Application Name Enter an application name. Use Embedded Application Set to use the embedded application.
PAGE 176
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Polling Setting When linked to an external application, you can store and manage addresses in order to use a service that uses a polling function. The application communication module is required. Item Settings Server 1 - Server 2 Set to enable each of the servers. Polling Address Enter the URL of the server or computer that the machine will poll. Check Interval Enter the check interval for the server. The default is 1 minute.
PAGE 177
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS If a paper misfeed occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear. Misfeed has occurred.
PAGE 178
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE This section explains how to clean the machine, replace the toner cartridge, the waste toner box, and the stamp cartridge. REGULAR MAINTENANCE To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
PAGE 179
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE SCANNING AREA If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the thin long glass next to the document glass). To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position. 1 Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.
PAGE 180
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 6 Replace the glass cleaner.
PAGE 181
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE LASER UNIT When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns (coloured lines) may form in the printed image. Identifying lines (coloured lines) caused by a dirty laser unit • Coloured lines always appear in the same place. (The lines are never black.) • Coloured lines appear in parallel with the direction of paper feeding. • Coloured lines appear not only on output from a copier but also on prints from a computer.
PAGE 182
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Point the cleaner down and slowly insert the tool into the hole to be cleaned in the laser unit. 4 (A) Be sure to point the cleaner down. Labels similar to (A) are attached to areas that require cleaning. Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the hole and then pull it back out. 5 Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.
PAGE 183
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Replace the cleaning tool. 8 (1) (1) Engage the cleaning tool onto the boss and turn it around it, and then put the edge (non-cleaner side) on the right-hand hook. (2) Put the left-hand side of the cleaning tool over the hook to place it on the near side. Boss (3) Turn the cleaning tool onto hook. (2) (3) 9 Close the front cover. REPLACING THE CLEANER 1 Open the front cover and take out a replacement cleaner. Replacement cleaners are stored in the front cover.
PAGE 184
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 2 Remove the dirty cleaner from the tip of the cleaning tool. While firmly grasping the tool where the cleaner is attached, use your other hand to press down on the hook that secures the cleaner, and remove the cleaner. Put the removed cleaner back on the inner cover. After replacing the cleaner, be sure to close the inner cover. 3 Attach the new cleaner to the cleaning tool. Align the cleaner hook with the attachment hole in the cleaning tool.
PAGE 185
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent. CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used, wipe the surface of the roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
PAGE 186
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE Always replace the toner cartridge after the "Change the toner cartridge." message appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out. You can replace a toner cartridge without stopping printing. Replacement message Toner Low. (□□□□)(Do not replace cartridge until requested.
PAGE 187
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Open the toner cover. 1 2 Magenta Cyan Yellow Black Pull the toner cartridge toward you. Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. (Example) Replacing the yellow toner cartridge. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine. 3 Take a new toner cartridge out of its package and shake it horizontally five or six times.
PAGE 188
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 4 Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level. A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour. 5 Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in place. 6 Close the toner cover. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is taking place.
PAGE 189
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE • Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns. • Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children. • If a toner cartridge is stored upright, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side. • If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine.
PAGE 190
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOTTLE The waste toner bottle collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner bottle becomes full, the message "Replace waste toner bottle." will appear. When this message appears, tap the guidance key that appears on the touch panel to view the procedure for replacing the waste toner bottle. When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing the waste toner bottle will appear. Follow the instructions.
PAGE 191
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace the stamp cartridge (AR-SV1). Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 1 Open the automatic document feeder. 2 Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass.
PAGE 192
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 6 Push the stamp unit back in. 7 Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder. 8 Make sure that the document backplate sheet is firmly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 193
Icons COPIER Functions you can use in Easy Copy mode Eco Eco-friendly functions Functions for copying on special media MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY. . . 2-37 • MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY . . . 2-37 • SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • EASY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • NORMAL MODE . . . . . . . .
PAGE 194
COPIER • EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB ADJUST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (COLOUR BALANCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . .
PAGE 195
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY MODE There are two modes for copying: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most copy jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for copying. 1st screen Show the size of the placed original.
PAGE 196
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for copying. Enter the number of copies. No. of copies Send as well as print 1 Quick File Colour Mode Setting keys used for copying. Store Data Temporarily Full Colour File Original Store Data in Folder Auto A4 Call Eco Program Paper Select Displays the list of function keys. Frequently used [Others], programs, and other settings can be registered.
PAGE 197
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPYING SEQUENCE This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy operation takes place smoothly. For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.
PAGE 198
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER 3 Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-32) If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting. In Easy mode In Normal mode Original A4 No.
PAGE 199
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER 5 Check the preview image. Display the preview image of the scanned original. In the preview screen, check the settings such as colour mode and 2-sided copy.
PAGE 200
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Default settings for copying Set in “Default Settings” of “Copy Settings” in the System Settings. You can set a default value for each copy setting. Initial Status Settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function). The copier settings are reset to the initial state when the [Power] button is turned on, when the [CA] key is tapped, or when the auto clear interval has elapsed.
PAGE 201
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY PREVIEW You can tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original to check a preview of the scanned image. ► PREVIEW SCREEN (page 1-14) In normal mode While viewing the preview screen, you can adjust the exposure or colour, and configure the preview in your image. You can also drag the preview image to edit it, for example, changing, rotating, or deleting an original page.
PAGE 202
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE Easy mode The size of the placed original is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears next to the original size.
PAGE 203
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Orientation of placed original Place the original as shown below. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On "Preview Screen", view the image orientation or preview image. ► COPY PREVIEW (page 2-9) CBA ABC ABC Document feeder tray CBA Document glass Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized.
PAGE 204
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (Auto Paper Select). If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying, you can select the paper tray manually.
PAGE 205
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES This section explains how to select settings from the base screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) COPYING USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 206
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.
PAGE 207
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.
PAGE 208
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals Originals Copies Copies Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Originals Copies 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. • Dual-side copy helps to save paper.
PAGE 209
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 6 Tap the [Preview] key. Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals copy Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Dual-side copy helps to save paper. To change the default 2-sided copy mode: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy]. 1 2 3 Place the original on the document glass.
PAGE 210
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Original A4 Detail Paper Select A4 2-Sided Copy Tray 1 1→2 CA Preview Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off Check the paper (tray) and colour mode you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.
PAGE 211
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPY COLOUR MODES Select the colour mode from Auto, Full Colour, B/W, 2 Colour, and Single Colour. Auto The machine automatically detects whether each original is colour or black & white and switches the mode appropriately (full colour for a colour original or black & white for a black & white original). Full Colour The original is copied in full colour. B/W The original is copied in black and white.
PAGE 212
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copying in two colours The original is copied in two colours by changing a specific colour to another colour. 1 Tap the [Colour Mode] key. 2 Tap the [2 Colour] key. 3 Tap the [Change] key. Colour Mode (2) Auto Full Colour B/W (3) CA 4 Preview 2 Colour Reddish Colour Change Copies B/W Start Colour Start Tap the key of the colour to be extracted to specify the extract colour.
PAGE 213
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copying in single colour The original is copied in any one colour. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Colour Mode] key. 3 Tap the [Single Colour] key. 4 ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) No. of copies Tap the [Change] key. Original 1 Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 214
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied. ([Auto] is displayed.) This function automatically adjusts the image during black & white copying and full colour copying to obtain the most suitable copy.
PAGE 215
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 2 Tap or slide the slider to adjust the copy exposure. Exposure Auto Manual Lighten CA 3 Darken Copies Preview After the adjustment, tap . This completes the procedure in easy mode. B/W Start Colour Start To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) 4 5 Tap the [Exposure] key. Original 1 No. of copies Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 216
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original: When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original, tap the [Copy of Copy] checkbox so that appears. [Copy of Copy] is available when [Auto], [Text], [Printed Photo], or [Text/Printed Photo] is selected as the original image type. • To enhance the colour of a colour copy: Tap the [Colour Tone Enhancement] checkbox so that appears.
PAGE 217
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGE/REDUCE AUTO RATIO SELECT This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original.
PAGE 218
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MANUAL RATIO SELECTION This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying. The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio.
PAGE 219
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap Copy Ratio 100 Auto Image to set the ratio. After the settings are completed, tap . Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.
PAGE 220
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. 3 ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) No. of copies Tap the [by Size] key of the [Zoom] tab. Slightly Reduce (3% Reduction) 1 Copy Ratio Original Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 221
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio 50% 70% The following two methods can be used to specify the ratio. Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, which is pre-registered, with the adjust the ratio in 1% units.
PAGE 222
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tab. 3 ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) No. of copies Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio. Original 1 Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 223
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Perform steps 1 to 2 in Using the preset ratio key (page 2-27). 2 Tap the [by Size] key. 3 No. of copies Original 1 Change Size/Direction. Paper Select Copy Ratio Change Paper Feed Tray by Size 2-Sided Copy The copy ratio is calculated from specified sizes. Enter the image size and the finished size.
PAGE 224
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized. • Set the orientation and size of the original before scanning the original. • The original size is set in normal mode.
PAGE 225
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 No. of copies Tap the appropriate original size key. Colour Mode 1 2-Sided Copy Original After the settings are completed, tap Image Orientation .
PAGE 226
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 227
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 No. of copies Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Colour Mode 1 Original 2-Sided Copy Store/Delete Background Adjustment Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size.
PAGE 228
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Retrieving a stored original size 1 2 Perform steps 1 to 3 in Storing original sizes (Amend/Delete) (page 2-34). No. of copies Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.
PAGE 229
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-91)". For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-112)".
PAGE 230
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 7 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY 1 Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. 2 Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper. 3 ► SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-12) Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper.
PAGE 231
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES OUTPUT SORT/GROUP SETTING This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original. Auto Sort Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass. Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them.
PAGE 232
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STAPLE SETTINGS Specify whether or not the set of output will be stapled. Original Orientation - Staple OFF Staple Position Left Top Right Does not staple. 1 Staples Portrait orientation 2 Staples Stapleless Staple 1 Staples Landscape orientation 2 Staples Stapleless Staple • You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 1-14)". Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
PAGE 233
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Staple ON (excluding booklet) 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-32) 2 Select the number of staples and staple position. Staple / Punch Staple Position Off • After the settings are completed, tap . • A binding position cannot be selected for stapleless stapling.
PAGE 234
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Saddle Stitch 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-32) 2 Select . 3 Select binding edge and original settings. After the settings are completed, tap . ► MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) (page 2-62) After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 235
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Trimmer Setting 1 Original No. of copies Change Size/Direction. N-Up Output Output Tray Put Multiple Pages in A Page Margin Shift Upper Tray When Saddle Stitch is selected, tap the [Trimmer Setting] key. Shift Position to Have Margin Erase Middle Tray Erase Shadow Around Lower Tray Offset Sort/Group Staple Separator Page Punch Fold Proof Copy Off Preview 1 Staple 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Trimmer Setting Original 3 4 Others 2 CA B4 A3 No.
PAGE 236
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES PUNCH SETTINGS This function punches copies and outputs them to the tray. Example Original 1 Original 2 Original Orientation OFF Punch Positions Punch Positions Punch Position Left Top Right Does not punch. Portrait orientation Landscape orientation • To change the default punch settings: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Punch]. • Punch positions are linked to staple positions.
PAGE 237
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-32) 2 Select punching and set the position. After the settings are completed, tap . In normal mode • You can select the offset output checkbox easy removal from the output tray.
PAGE 238
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES FOLD SETTING This function is used to fold copies before delivery to the output tray. Fold Inside Fold Outside • To change the default fold setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Fold]. • A saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the fold function. • The fold function cannot be used in combination with the staple function and punch function.
PAGE 239
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS This function inserts separator pages between each set of copies or between each job. When you insert separator pages between sets of copies, you can specify whether to insert the separator page before or after each set. You can also specify the number of copies that makes one set. When you insert separator pages between jobs, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each job.
PAGE 240
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 Specify the separator page insertion mode. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 241
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2-Up to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4-Up to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8-Up to copy eight original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
PAGE 242
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up Tap the number of originals you want to copy collectively, and select the layout key. 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up If needed, the images will be rotated. If you have finished selecting settings, go to step 7. N-Up OFF CA 4 Preview Copies Colour Start B/W Start To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) 5 6 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key.
PAGE 243
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document. Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document 5 6 5 6 The facing pages are copied onto 2 separate pages. Book or bound document • Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.
PAGE 244
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Place the original on the document glass. 3 ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . Size mark Centreline of B4 original Centreline of A3 original Centreline of 11" x 17" original The page on this side is copied first. Centreline of original To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
PAGE 245
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
PAGE 246
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. • To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping . • When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to to the original size. , the original is enlarged or reduced with the ratio appropriate To cancel the Card Shot settings: Tap the [Off] key.
PAGE 247
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT) This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. You can set any of the following three types of repeat copy. Repeat method Description Auto Repeat The maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio being selected from the base screen.
PAGE 248
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 3 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. 4 Tap the [Auto Repeat] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 249
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 7 Specify the repeat partition line. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Colour Mode Repeat Layout Auto Layout of Repeat Face Based on Original, Paper Size and Ratio. Current Setting Off Auto Repeat B5 A4 Copy Ratio 100% Layout Layout w/o spacing Parting Line After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Select Type/Exposure Original Paper Select Fixed Repeat Photo Repeat Background Adjustment Exposure No.
PAGE 250
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Original Others Change Size/Direction. Repeat Layout Colour Mode Layout Select Image Layout Background Adjustment Exposure Tap the [Layout] key. Tap the [Layout w/o spacing] key and [Layout evenly spaced] key to select the layout. Select Type/Exposure Layout w/o spacing Layout evenly spaced Proof Copy CA Preview Back 6 4 A3 A4 B/W Start Colour Start Specify the repeat partition line.
PAGE 251
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat) 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 2-56). 2 Tap the [Photo Repeat] key. 3 Place the original on the document glass. 4 Tap the [Original] key and select an original size. 5 When you tap the original size key, the original direction is indicated in the "How To Set". Place the original to meet the displayed orientation.
PAGE 252
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS (BUSINESS CARD COPY) Business Card Copy can be used to copy up to 8 business cards on one sheet of paper. This function can be used when you want to create the list of business cards, and when you want to file business cards. 1-Sheet Layout 1 2-Sheet Layout 8-Sheet Layout Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Place a business card, and select the paper to be used to copy the card.
PAGE 253
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • To Business Card Copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. 5 The zoom is fixed at 100%.
PAGE 254
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS Other functions are set from the base screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Other functions cannot be selected in easy mode. OUTPUT AND LAYOUT EDITING FUNCTIONS MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) Copies made by "Booklet" can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
PAGE 255
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS • To make Booklet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function. ► COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) (page 2-68) • When Booklet is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the booklet function cannot be used. • Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine.
PAGE 256
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-12)". • If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
PAGE 257
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH BOOKLET PAGE (BOOKLET 2-Up/4-Up) This function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format. Originals Booklet 2-Up 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 3 10 8 14 4 • The following paper sizes and number of sheets are available for booklet 2-Up or 4-Up.
PAGE 258
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 No. of copies N-Up 1 Put Multiple Pages in A Page Erase Booklet Erase Shadow Around Off Select Original Type. Left Binding/ Tablet 1-Sided When not inserting a cover, go to step 6. 2-Sided Booklet Right Binding Tap the [1-Sided], [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.
PAGE 259
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 9 Tap [Border], and select the border. Booklet 1 Copy Like A Pamphlet N-Up Colour Mode Select Original Type to Arrange in 1 Page. Margin Shift Shift Position to Have Margin Layout Off 2-Up 4-Up A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap twice, and [Back] keys in sequence. Proof Copy 8-Up Off Border Preview CA Original Back 3 4 B4 A3 A4 B/W Start Colour Start To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
PAGE 260
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) This function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
PAGE 261
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Others Select a binding position. Output Erase Book Copy When not inserting a cover, tap the sequence. Then, go to step 5. Erase Shadow Around Select Original Binding Edge. Colour Mode Off and [Back] keys in Left Binding Right Binding Proof Copy Preview CA Cover Setting Back 3 44 B4 A3A3 A4 B/W Start Colour Start To cancel the book copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. 4 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.
PAGE 262
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE) This function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. • Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original. • This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open. • The scanned original is split in the centre. The document glass is not available for this function.
PAGE 263
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original. The blank pages are not copied. Blank page Copy • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.
PAGE 264
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Blank Page Skip 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Colour Mode Off Erase Erase Shadow Around After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Skip Blank Page Proof Copy Skip Blank and Back Shadow Preview B4 A3 3 4 Back B/W Start A4 CA Colour Start To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
PAGE 265
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter. Adjust light areas in this way. Level [-] You must select Background Adjustment before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key. Tap value.
PAGE 266
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
PAGE 267
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY) This function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the settings. Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scanning the original in the changed setting.
PAGE 268
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 No. of copies Copies Send as well as print 1 Quick File Colour Mode Full Colour Store Data Temporarily File Original Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys. Store Data in Folder Auto A4 Call Eco Program Paper Select Auto 2-Sided Copy 1-Sided→1-Sided Proof Copy Copy Ratio 100% Plain1 A4 Exposure Preview CA Auto Output 1 2 A4 A4 5 B4 A3 3 4 Others A4 Colour Start B/W Start Up to 9999 copies (sets) can be set.
PAGE 269
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT) This function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making a copy. By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes. • The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
PAGE 270
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY) This function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time. Master machine and client machine The master machine performs only scanning, and a client machine registered in the master machine performs only printing without scanning the original.
PAGE 271
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
PAGE 272
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) Characters to prevent unauthorised copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern. When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear. PY AB CD AB CD O TC NO ’ DO T Y P CO NO ’ DO • "Hidden Pattern Print" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised copying.
PAGE 273
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as required. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Stamp Hidden Pattern Print Print Date and Stamp Default Settings Off Print Colour On Print Contents Setting Colour Mode Black 2-Sided Copy Exposure Standard N-Up Font Size 48point Put Multiple Pages in A Page Proof Copy Angle Function Rev.
PAGE 274
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION (TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT) This function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorised copy. Originals Trace information area • If this function is specified together with another image compositing function, trace information is printed at the top. • Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame.
PAGE 275
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT POSITION AND MARGIN ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT) This function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
PAGE 276
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the image shift direction. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Output Margin Shift 2-Sided Copy Side 1 Side 2 Off Paper Select Change Paper Feed Tray Right Background Adjustment Left 10 Down ( 0~50 ) mm 10 Proof Copy ( 0~50 ) mm Preview CA Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st. Back 4 3 4 B4 A3 A4 B/W Start Colour Start Sets a margin shift width.
PAGE 277
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE) The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books.
PAGE 278
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Booklet Others Copy Like A Pamphlet Original Erase Change Size/Direction. Clear 2-Sided Copy Up Outer Frame Colour Mode Specify Frame+Centre Left Background Adjustment Right Down Reverse erase position of back face Proof Copy Preview Back 3 4 B4 A3 A4 B/W Start CA Colour Start Check that he tapped checkbox is set to .
PAGE 279
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY) This feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges. The punch function cannot be used. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key. "Select larger paper size than output image size of original." is displayed on the page. Tap [OK]. When you have finished selecting other settings, tap the [Back] key.
PAGE 280
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING) This function centres the copied image on the paper. This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced. Not using the centring function Using the centring function Centring must be specified before scanning the original. • When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
PAGE 281
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE) This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy. You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position. We recommend that you specify the top as the starting side of the original. Position Image is used Originals Printing paper Position Image is not used Top edge of paper 1 Copy the original that you want to use for Move Copy.
PAGE 282
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Sets a movement distance. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Erase Position Image Clear Please designate print start position. Side1 Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front or reverse side, and enter the distance using numeric keys. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.
PAGE 283
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING FUNCTIONS COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) This function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. This saves you the trouble of sorting the copies. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first.
PAGE 284
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 3 Change settings as needed. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Start] key to scan the first original. Indicator line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) 4 Change Setting of Following Original Copies A4 Place next original. Colour Mode Press [Start] to scan original.
PAGE 285
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next set of originals in step 4 of "Copying in job build mode (page 2-91)". A [Separator Page] setting cannot be changed for the second and later sets. 1 Tap the [Change Setting] key. 2 Change copy settings. 3 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
PAGE 286
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) This feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
PAGE 287
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS • When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used. • The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.). To set the machine to always scan mixed originals • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Original Feeding Mode].
PAGE 288
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. The "2-Sided→2-Sided" and "2-Sided→1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
PAGE 289
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING HEAVY ORIGINALS (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) When you wish to scan heavy originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent heavy originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D Heavy Paper Scan must be specified before scanning the original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Heavy Paper Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
PAGE 290
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION) This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling the high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application. • Resolution must be specified before scanning the original. • The resolution setting is applied when making a full-size black & white copy. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] key. Select the resolution. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 291
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) This function prints information such as the "Date" or "Stamp", which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following six types of information. • Date • Page No. • Stamp • Copies • Text • Watermark For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIORITY". You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text.
PAGE 292
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Combined function name Print operation Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and inserts. Covers/Inserts 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key. 3 Tap a tab to be printed, and tap the format. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 293
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting using the [Text] tab Tap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 294
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE) This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. Following are two types of custom images. • Custom stamp (Full-colour stamp image) MEMO MEMO C on fid en tia l • Custom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark) The combination with other functions is described in the table below.
PAGE 295
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Combined function Custom image operations B/W Reverse Prints an image as normal without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background. Custom stamp: Printed in white Custom watermark: Printed without being whitened Full Bleed Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal. Centring Makes a stamp copy as normal without centring. Colour Adjustments Makes a stamp copy using the registered data. Stamp Makes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu.
PAGE 296
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [Custom Stamp] or [Custom Watermark] key. 4 Tap the [Image] key to select an image. Select the required thumbnail image(s) from the available selection. 5 Set [Print Page] or [Print Position]. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Stamp Custom Image After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Print Date and Stamp Select Image to Operate.
PAGE 297
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed. • To insert insertion sheets, see "INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-113)". • For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes covers.
PAGE 298
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 1-sided copy 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
PAGE 299
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2 1 1-sided copy 4 5 Resulting copies Back Cover 3 Front Cover 6 Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies. Not copied Not copied 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
PAGE 300
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
PAGE 301
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 2 1 1-sided copy 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 2-sided copy 2-sided copy 3 4 5 6 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 1-sided copy 2-sided copy 3 4 5 6 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
PAGE 302
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Not copied 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover Not copied 1-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. * The second original page is not copied.
PAGE 303
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 4 1 6 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 1-sided copy 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied.
PAGE 304
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Change Size/Direction. N-Up Covers/Inserts Front Cover Put Multiple Pages in A Page Cancel All Back Cover Insert Sheet Output Colour Mode Off Margin Shift Bypass On Shift Position to Have Margin Plain Change Make No Copy Proof Copy CA Preview Paper Tray Settings Page Layout 3 4 Back 5 Tap the [Change] key. Original Others B4 A3 A4 Colour Start B/W Start Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 305
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. There are two types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified. Insert covers if needed. When inserting covers, see "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-105)". Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.
PAGE 306
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Resulting copies 3 6 5 1 3 5 6 2 Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. 4 1 4 Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. 2 Insertion sheet setting conditions 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet. 2-sided original copying Resulting copies 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 5 6 2 4 1 Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. 6 Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode.
PAGE 307
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. 3 Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab. 4 Tap the [Insertion Type A] key, and tap the insert page display key. 5 The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 308
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Covers/Inserts Output Cancel All Colour Mode Insertion Type A Margin Shift Copy on Insert A Paper Tray Bypass Plain Shift Position to Have Margin Make No Copy Simplex Proof Copy 2-Sided Copy Preview CA When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key.
PAGE 309
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below. • For the "Cover Sheet", you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided. • For "Insert Sheet", you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
PAGE 310
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets. B C A Inserts When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-Sided→1-Sided" mode can be used.
PAGE 311
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Tap the [On] key. Original Change Size/Direction. N-Up Transparency Inserts Put Multiple Pages in A Page Colour Mode Off Margin Shift Also Make Copy on Inserts Shift Position to Have Margin On When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.
PAGE 312
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC USES COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions. ABC ABC ABC DEF DEF GHI GHI Prepare originals that match the tab positions.
PAGE 313
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Tab copying with a right binding Originals Originals Final image Placing the originals Document feeder tray Insert the originals so that the side with no tab text enters first. Document glass 1 Loading tab paper Bypass tray (on the machine) Tray 4 Side 1 Side 2 Place the first sheet of tab paper so that the tab faces away from you. Large capacity trays Place the first sheet of tab paper so that the tab faces away from you.
PAGE 314
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Sets an image shift width (tab width). Original Others Change Size/Direction. File Tab Copy • Tap the numeric value display indicating the image shift width, and enter a shift width using numeric keys. Store Data in Folder Colour Mode Original Off Copy Exposure Select Type/Exposure • After the settings are completed, tap in sequence.
PAGE 315
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT) This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets. Original (A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size) Copy (enlarged image on 8 sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper) • You must select Multi-Page Enlargement before scanning the original. • Place an original on the document glass. • When Multi-Page Enlargement is selected, the image orientation is changed to vertical.
PAGE 316
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to. Others Multi-Page Enlargement Original Size A5 A4 B5 A3 Clear Inch AB B4 Original Orientation Enlargement Size Please set original like this. A2 (A3x2) A1 (A3x4) Proof Copy A0 (A3x8) Preview The image orientation appears. After the settings are completed, tap sequence.
PAGE 317
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. Originals Mirror image copy Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the mirror image setting: Tap the [Mirror Image] key to uncheck it. 2 Place the original.
PAGE 318
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE) This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. This function can only be used for black and white copying. Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption. Originals B/W reverse copy • B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.
PAGE 319
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT) You can easily adjust the colour and outlines of images and text. You must select Quick Image Quality Adjustment before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick Image Quality Adjustment] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the image quality. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Brightness Quick Image Quality Adjustment Adjust Colour Tone and Darkness.
PAGE 320
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB ADJUST) This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R(Red)+ G(Green)+ B(Blue)+ RGB must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. Tap the key of the colour you want to adjust. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the colouring. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 321
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image. Softer Sharper Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 322
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (COLOUR BALANCE) You can adjust the colour, tone, and density of copies. Use the [Colour] tab for colour copy settings, or the [B/W] tab for black & white copy settings. If you select the [Colour] tab, the densities of the colours yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are divided into three ranges, and you can adjust the density of each range. If needed, you can also adjust all three density ranges at once.
PAGE 323
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Change Size/Direction. RGB Colour Balance Cancel All Adjust Thickness of RGB Adjust Colour Tone for Copy. Exposure Colour + L Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the colour balance.
PAGE 324
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (BRIGHTNESS) This function adjusts the brightness of a colour copy image. Dark Originals Light Brightness must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Brightness] key. Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the brightness. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Intensity Brightness Adjust Intensity This setting is only applied to colour.
PAGE 325
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (INTENSITY) This function adjusts the intensity (saturation) of a colour copy image. Weakening the intensity Originals Strengthening the intensity You must set the intensity before scanning the original. This function cannot be combined with [Copy of Copy] or [Colour Tone Enhancement] in Exposure. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Intensity] key. Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the intensity.
PAGE 326
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS INTERRUPT COPY This function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy. When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy. • The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned. • Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
PAGE 327
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start interrupt copying. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job will resume. The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original.
PAGE 328
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS SEND DATA WHILE COPYING This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e-mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder. You need to store the destination in the address book in advance. ► User's Manual (Address Book Registration) The fax and image send transmission starts after the copy, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions.
PAGE 329
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Set each copy item as required. These copy settings are used for fax transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function. You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key. 6 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. After the copy, the transmission starts. After the copy, you cannot preview the settings before transmission.
PAGE 330
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS COPY JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)". Easy Scan LINE Easy Scan PRINTER Job Status Sharp OSA No.
PAGE 331
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS PROGRAMS Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Programs cannot be stored in easy mode. Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program]. This is used to prohibit the deletion and change of copy settings stored in job programs.
PAGE 332
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored The settings are stored in a program, so they can be selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time. In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting mistakes. Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each month because the above settings must be selected.
PAGE 333
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Select whether or not the program will be added to the home screen or the favourites. Program registration is completed. At the same time, it can be registered Program Registration for Favorite or Home to use shortcut. Do you register? Select Program No.
PAGE 334
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 2 No. of copies Tap [Delete] on the action panel. Change Name 1 Delete Call Program Call registered settings when touched. Register in Favorite Pre-Setting Program Register for Home 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 Proof Copy 3 4 Others 3 Preview B4 A3 Colour Start B/W Start A4 CA Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap [Delete]. Renaming a program 1 2 Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
PAGE 335
Icons Eco Eco-friendly functions PRINTER Functions for printing on special media The explanations in this chapter are based on American English and the North American version of the software. Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version. CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 336
PRINTER PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES. . . • PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 337
PRINTER►PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE The machine is equipped with a full color printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment. Windows environment Printer driver type PCL6 The machine support the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages.
PAGE 338
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory application in Windows. • The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application. • The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.
PAGE 339
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Select print settings. 3 (1) Click the [Main] tab. (1) (2) Select the original size. • You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the menu. To store an original size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the menu, and click the [OK] button. • To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings.
PAGE 340
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP The printer driver settings screen consists of 9 tabs. Click a tab to select the settings on that tab. You can check information on each of the settings in the Help screen. Click the [Help] button at the bottom right of the screen. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Tabs: Click to change the tabs shown. •[Main]: Frequently used functions are grouped on this tab.
PAGE 341
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (6) Print image This lets you visually check how the current settings affect the print image. Finishing settings and the color mode are indicated by icons. (7) Machine image This shows the options that are installed on the machine, and the paper trays and output trays that are used. (8) [Help] button Displays the Help window of the printer driver. • Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
PAGE 342
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING ON ENVELOPES The bypass tray or tray 4 can be used for envelope printing. For the types of paper that can be used in the tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-91)". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-112)". For the procedure for loading paper in the tray 4, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 3-7)".
PAGE 343
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. • If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each print job.
PAGE 344
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) (1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Enter your user information. (2) (3) (4) • When authentication is performed by login name, select [Login Name] and enter your login name. • When authentication is performed by login name/password, click [Login Name/Password] and enter your login name and password.
PAGE 345
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as Favorite. Saving frequently used settings or complex color settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them. Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window.
PAGE 346
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT USING SAVED SETTINGS You can specify the saved favorites through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated color settings to your printing. 1 Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Select favorite settings.
PAGE 347
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS You can change the default settings of the printer driver. Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application. 1 Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. In Windows 8.
PAGE 348
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application "TextEdit" in macOS. • To install the printer driver and configure settings in a macOS environment, see the Software Setup Guide. • The explanations of screens and procedures for use in a macOS environment generally assume that macOS 10.12 is being used and a PPD driver is installed.
PAGE 349
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT Select print settings. 4 (1) (1) Make sure that the correct printer is selected. (2) Select an item from the menu and configure the settings as needed. (3) Click the [Print] button. (2) (3) SELECTING THE PAPER This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.
PAGE 350
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING ON ENVELOPES The bypass tray or tray 4 can be used for envelope printing. • For the types of paper that can be used in the tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-91)". • For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-112)". • For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 3-15)".
PAGE 351
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.
PAGE 352
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) (1) Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected. (2) Select [Job Handling]. (3) Click the [Authentication] tab. (2) (4) Enter your user information. (3) (4) (5) • When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password".
PAGE 353
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE COLOR MODE The following three selections are available for the "Color Mode" (a set of colors used for printing): Automatic The machine automatically determines whether each page is color or black and white and prints the page accordingly. Pages with colors other than black and white are printed using Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner. Pages that are only black and white are printed using Bk (Black) toner only.
PAGE 354
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Image Quality]. (2) Select "Color Mode".
PAGE 355
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE RESOLUTION The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution): 600 dpi This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table. 600 dpi (High Quality) The print quality of color photos and text are high. 1200 dpi Select this mode to print color photos with higher definition, and to print fine lines clearly. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select "Print Mode".
PAGE 356
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 2-SIDED PRINTING The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper. Paper orientation Print results Long Edge Short Edge Short Edge Long Edge Portrait Landscape The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side. The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.
PAGE 357
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-Edge binding]. FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document.
PAGE 358
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the original size from [Original Size] (for example: A4). (3) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from [Output Size] (for example: A3). If the output size is larger than the original size, the printed image will be automatically enlarged. macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Check the paper size for the print image (for example: A4). (2) Select [Paper Handling]. (3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].
PAGE 359
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets. For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) is selected, the following print results will be obtained, depending on the selected page order.
PAGE 360
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the number of pages per sheet. (3) Select the order of the pages. (4) If you wish to print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. • To print the first page normally (as a cover), select the [N-Up with cover] checkbox ( ).
PAGE 361
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES If the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing. Do not print blank pages Blank page Print This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 362
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT Staple function The staple function staples the output. To create materials with more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing. This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
PAGE 363
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the staple function or the punch function. • For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu and the staple position in the“Position”menu. • For the punch function, select the type of punch in the "Punch" menu and the punch position in the "Position" menu. In addition to the [Finishing] tab, [Staple] can also be set on the [Main] tab.
PAGE 364
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet. If a saddle finisher is installed and if "Booklet" and "Staple" are selected, this function automatically folds and outputs the copies.
PAGE 365
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS If a saddle stitch finisher is installed (4) (5) (4) Click the [Finishing] tab. (5) Select [Saddle Stitch] from "Staple". When a saddle finisher (large capacity) is installed and the job is not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch], select [Saddle Stitch (Reverse)]. macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select [Saddle Stitch]. (4) Select [Off] or [2-Up].
PAGE 366
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPER If a trimmer unit is installed, you can trim off excess edges of paper for a finer finish. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Trimming] button. (3) Set the [Trimming] checkbox to , and specify "Trimming Width".
PAGE 367
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Trimming]. (2) Set the [Trimming] checkbox to . (3) Specify the trimming width.
PAGE 368
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN) This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper. If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together. This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text. By shifting the image, the part of the image that is outside the print area will not be printed.
PAGE 369
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select "Margin Shift".
PAGE 370
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING) One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created (overlap function). This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 371
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION) This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (4) (2) (5) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Custom].
PAGE 372
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes). ABCD ABCD Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select [Portrait (Rotated)] or [Landscape (Rotated)] in "Orientation".
PAGE 373
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE) This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportions of the image. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Main] tab.
PAGE 374
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). (2) Click the [OK] button.
PAGE 375
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (WIDTH) Adjusting line widths used in data such as CAD This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PAGE 376
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Thickening fine lines in Excel When fine border lines in Excel do not print correctly, you can make the lines thicker. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • Normally this setting is not necessary. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select the [Thicken Fine Lines] checkbox ( ).
PAGE 377
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Adjusting the thickness of text and lines You can make text and lines thicker. You can also make edges smoother or sharper. Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Specify the settings. Item Text/Line control Text Description You can make characters and text thicker.
PAGE 378
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Advanced2]. (3) Specify the settings.
PAGE 379
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS) The image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. B B In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal].
PAGE 380
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS COLOR MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (COLOR ADJUSTMENT/RGB ADJUSTMENT) This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab.
PAGE 381
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK) When printing a color image in grayscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colors are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale. ABCD ABCD • Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 382
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE (ADVANCED COLOR SETTINGS) Preset color settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most suitable color settings for the color image type. Advanced color settings, such as the color management settings and the screening setting for adjusting the color tone expression, are also available for meeting the needs of color image printing.
PAGE 383
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select [Image Type]. • Text: Data consisting mostly of text • Presentation: Data with many photos or illustrations • Photo: Photo data or data that uses photos • CAD: Engineering drawing data • Scan: Data scanned by a scanner • Colorimetric: Data to be printed in colors as viewed on the screen • Custom: Data to be printed with special settings (3) Click the [Advanced Color] button and specify the settings.
PAGE 384
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Image Quality]. (2) Click the [Advanced] tab. To use the macOS color management function, select the [ColorSync] checkbox so that the checkmark case, you cannot select "Image Type". appears. In this (3) Select [Image Type]. To configure color management settings, select the desired settings from the menus.
PAGE 385
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK) CO NF ID EN TI A L This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list. When necessary, you can enter text to create an original watermark. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PAGE 386
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Watermarks]. (2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings. • Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text. • Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar .
PAGE 387
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP) This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data. This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjusted. MEMO MEMO This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PAGE 388
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PAGE 389
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS) This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations.
PAGE 390
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When printing is started, a confirmation message will appear. The overlay file will not be created until the [Yes] button is clicked. • When you click the [Open] button, the existing overlay file is registered. Printing with an overlay file (2) (3) (1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Select an overlay file.
PAGE 391
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING THE NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP) You can add the number of copies to the header or footer of the print data. You can also set a copies number and print position. This function is available in a Windows environment. (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Copies Stamp] button. (3) Select the settings, and click the [OK] button.
PAGE 392
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) In a Windows environment The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert colored paper or a different paper type at specified pages.
PAGE 393
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS (3) Select the paper insertion settings. • Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing method from the corresponding menus. • Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in "Information". • When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "Favorites" to save the settings. • When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Tray", be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that type of paper in the bypass tray.
PAGE 394
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper. A B C Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Inserts] tab.
PAGE 395
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Transparency Inserts] in "Feature Sets". (3) Select the transparency insert settings. When [On (Printed)] is selected from "Transparency Inserts", the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed. Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the bypass tray.
PAGE 396
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES You can insert separator pages between jobs or the specified number of copies. Job 1 1 2 3 1 Job 2 1 2 2 3 Job 1 3 1 Job 2 2 3 This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Separator Page] button.
PAGE 397
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) This function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and colored paper is loaded into tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command.
PAGE 398
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB SHIFT/TAB PAPER PRINT) There are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Shift" and "Tab Paper Print". Tab Shift Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the test shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window. The text will be printed on the tabs.
PAGE 399
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows Tab Shift When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps: (1) (6) (3) (4) (5) (2) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Tab Shift]. (4) Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. (5) Click the [OK] button. (6) Select the paper source and type.
PAGE 400
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only) Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings. (3) (1) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Tab Paper] from “Inserts Option”, and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the tab position settings. For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in "Favorites".
PAGE 401
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS) This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper. Example: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
PAGE 402
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING (FOLD) If a folding unit is installed, print paper can be folded. For example, if A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and A3 (11" × 17") size print images are mixed, you can fold A3 (11" × 17") size paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size to adjust the width of the actual print paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size. When necessary, you can staple folded sheets. To use the Half Fold and Saddle Fold (Staple) functions, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher.
PAGE 403
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Folding types Print Side Fold Orientation Folding results Description Open Right ABC AC Open Left ABC AC Inside C-Fold Open Right ABC Open Left ABC C For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet. A Outside - Open Right CA ABC AC ABC AC Accordion Fold - Open Left 3-69 For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope.
PAGE 404
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Folding types Print Side Fold Orientation Folding results Description Open Right ABCD AD Open Left ABCD AD Open Right ABCD DA Open Left ABCD DA ABCD AB D ABCD CD A Inside Double Fold For example, paper is folded in four so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.
PAGE 405
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS This function cannot be used when [Common Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex] is selected. • When printing data in a pamphlet layout, the "Booklet" function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet. See "CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) (page 3-30)". • The Fold function cannot be used together with the Punch and Staple functions.
PAGE 406
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS Folding (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Folding]. (3) Select the desired folding method. Folding(Z-Fold) (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features], then select [Folding(Z-Fold)]. (2) Configure Fold settings.
PAGE 407
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE) This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page. Pre-set data • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PAGE 408
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the repeat count in "N-Up".
PAGE 409
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying. PY AB CD AB CD O TC O ’N DO PY O TC O ’N DO • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 410
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • "Hidden Pattern" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage. • Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Settings (administrator)", select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case.
PAGE 411
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS) In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered. When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 412
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA) By maximizing the print area, you can print on the full paper size. This function is available in a Windows environment. Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select [Maximum] from the "Printable Area". (4) Click the [OK] button.
PAGE 413
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AT AN ENHANCED RESOLUTION (SMOOTHING) Resolution enhancement techniques (RETs) are used to smoothen the outlines of images. The images are printed at a digitally enhanced resolution. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select the [Smoothing] checkbox so that appears.
PAGE 414
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT) To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large print job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints.
PAGE 415
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Select [On] in "Tandem Print". The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using "Custom Installation" with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [Yes] checkbox selected for "Do you want to use Tandem Print function?". macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Tandem Print]. (2) Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that appears.
PAGE 416
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING) This function stores a print job as a file on the machine's local drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users. • Hold Only This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's local drive without printing it.
PAGE 417
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print]. • When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Document Filing" is cleared. • If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab and select the format from "Rip Style".
PAGE 418
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all document filing (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted. To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary: • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Authentication Settings] → [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].
PAGE 419
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver. • Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "User's Manual (Address Book Registration)".
PAGE 420
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
PAGE 421
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 2 Folder Select Main Folder Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel. Scan to Local Drive Quick File Folder Scan to External Memory Device Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Select File from Network Folder to Print CA 3 Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access. 4 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key on the action panel.
PAGE 422
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly. • Use a FAT32 or NTFS USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
PAGE 423
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 4 Select the print conditions. 5 Tap the [Start] key. • If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints. • If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 3, the print conditions in the file will be given priority. Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. Remove the USB memory device from the machine.
PAGE 424
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings 1 Tap the [File Retrieve] key. 2 Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. 3 Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access.
PAGE 425
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Entering the network folder path directly 1 Direct Input of Path OK Path Input to Folder Tap [Direct Input of Folder Path] in step 3 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings (page 3-90) ". Direct Input of Folder Path Open Registered Network Folder. Refer to Folders on Network User Name PIN Code/ Password CA 2 Enter the path to the folder, user name and password. Access the network folder.
PAGE 426
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER SUBMIT PRINT JOB By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from "Settings (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network.
PAGE 427
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER FTP PRINT You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine. To perform FTP print: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Print Setting from PC/Mobile Terminal], set [FTP Print] to [Enable], and then configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.
PAGE 428
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Performing e-mail print Using your PC's e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed. Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are entered in the format "command name = value" as shown in the example to the right.
PAGE 429
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS PRINTER JOBS CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)".
PAGE 430
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available, you can use paper that is set in a different tray.
PAGE 431
PRINTER►APPENDIX APPENDIX PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST For information on the setting items, refer to printer driver Help.
PAGE 432
PRINTER►APPENDIX Function Tab (Windows) PCL6 Item Page Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter Inserts 3-67 Yes No No No Booklet 3-30 Yes Yes Yes Yes Page No. 3-25 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 9,16 2, 4, 6, 9,16 Repeat 3-74 Yes No No No Order 3-25 Yes Yes No Yes Border 3-25 Yes Yes No Yes N-Up with cover 3-25 Yes No No No 100% N-Up 3-25 Yes Yes No No 3-36 Yes Yes No No Margin Shift 3-34 10mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.
PAGE 433
PRINTER►APPENDIX Function Tab (Windows) Item Vector To Black PS Page Windows PPD macOS PPD 3-47 Yes Yes No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Color Mode 3-19 Yes Yes Yes Yes Image Type 3-48 Yes Yes Yes Yes Advanced Color 3-48 Yes Yes Yes Yes Color Adjustment/ RGB Adjustment 3-46 Yes Yes No No Font - Yes Yes No No Line Width 3-41 Yes No No No Boldness Adjustment - No No No No Mirror Image 3-45 No Yes Yes Yes PS Error Information - No Yes Yes No PS Pass
PAGE 434
PRINTER►APPENDIX SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER You can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine. For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE (page 1-62)". Enable billing code This setting is required only in the Windows environment. (Always usable under macOS environment) 1 Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. In Windows 8.
PAGE 435
PRINTER►APPENDIX Windows When printing starts, the billing code setting screen appears. Enter the main code and sub code, and click the [OK] button. To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to . • You can click [Get Billing Code] to get the machine's billing code list and select the billing code from the list.
PAGE 436
PRINTER►APPENDIX AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON When the user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer. When you use this function and print from the printer driver, the print job is sent to the machine using the authentication information that you used to log in to the computer.
PAGE 437
PRINTER►APPENDIX • Single Sign-on authentication is also possible from the Job Handling dialog box and the User Authentication dialog box. • When Single Sign-on is enabled, [Print and Send] cannot be used. • If you logged in to the machine in advance before using Single Sign-on, you will have the permissions of the user account you used to log in. If you use Single Sign-on without logging in to the machine, the user permissions will be those of "User". This may limit the functions that you can use.
PAGE 438
Icons FACSIMILE Functions you can use in Easy Fax mode • USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODE . . . . . . . . . . • USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . . . . • SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 439
FACSIMILE • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 • SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S LOCAL DRIVE (INBOUND ROUTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY . . . 4-72 PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE COMMUNICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • F-CODE COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 440
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX The facsimile expansion kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX To use the machine as a facsimile, connect the telephone line, and set the telephone line type. 1 Connecting to the telephone line. Insert the plug on one end of the telephone line cord into the telephone line socket (LINE) of the machine as shown, and insert the other plug into a wall telephone socket.
PAGE 441
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 2 Make sure the main power switch is in the " " position. When the main power indicator is lit up, the main power is in the " " position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the " " position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel.
PAGE 442
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX • To store the sender's name and address: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration]. • Sender Name Enter the sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the sender name. • Sender Fax Number Sets the sender fax number. To insert a pause between digits of the number, tap the [-] key.
PAGE 443
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX MODE Fax mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most fax jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for fax. 1st screen Show the size of the placed original. Tap this key to display the numeric keys.
PAGE 444
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for fax. Tap to display the numeric keys. Used to display the address book and enter a destination. Address Book Address Enter Fax No. Fax Number Finds an address. Sending History Exposure Displays functions available in fax mode. Call Search Number Auto Resolution Direct TX Super Fine Verification Stamp Original Used to change fax settings. Displays the list of setting keys.
PAGE 445
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX [R] KEY When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number inside your PBX, touch the [R] key before dialling to temporarily cancel the "PBX Setting".
PAGE 446
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE This section explains the basic steps for sending a fax. Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Enter the destination fax number. Tap the numeric keys to enter the destination number directly, or search and retrieve the address book or number.
PAGE 447
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 3 Configure the settings. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
PAGE 448
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX • Set the initial screen when selected from another mode In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Display Settings]. When resending by document filing or recalling by saved program settings that do not include an address, select from the following 6 types of base screens that appear.
PAGE 449
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-7) ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS Prohibit transmission when the fax number/address is entered manually In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] →[Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Direct Entry].
PAGE 450
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS Entering a Pause Between Digits of the Number Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "0"), or after the country code when dialling an international number. 1 Tap the [Pause] key. A hyphen "-" is entered when the [Pause] key is tapped once.
PAGE 451
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialling) It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by simply tapping the key. This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to (or poll) multiple fax destinations.
PAGE 452
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Address CA Sort A AAA AAA BBB BBB CCC CCC DDD DDD Direct Entry D • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with frequent use, categories, indexes, and keywords. (In normal mode, you can narrow down the destinations by job type.) J M EEE EEE P FFF FFF Frequent Use Category All W Tap a one-touch key of contact or group that includes the fax destination. Start • Tapping [Sort] allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list.
PAGE 453
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary. 1 Original Address A4 AAA AAA Address Book CA 2 1 Sending History + Tap the [All Destinations] key. Detail Direct Entry Start Preview Confirm the destination. All Destinations CA AAA AAA After the confirmation is completed, tap .
PAGE 454
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Address Book Address Tap [Call Search Number] on the action panel.
PAGE 455
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK If an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode (Web version), you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission. You can also add a retrieved address to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
PAGE 456
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Enter a keyword and tap the [Search Start] key. Search Start Enter Initials Item Target Name When you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard appears. The search results will appear after a brief interval. Preview Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. CA Start Speaker • If no destination is found: Tap the [Search Again] key. • To continuously add other destination. Tap the destination.
PAGE 457
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log. In normal mode, you can also add an address in a transmission history to the address book.
PAGE 458
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial. Delete All Histories Select Address to Send Again. AAA AAA 1472580369 The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. BBB BBB 3692580147 CCC CCC 2580147369 Direct Entry 1234567890 Direct Entry Preview CA 0987654321 Start Speaker To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
PAGE 459
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Number sequences entered using the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled as a single number. For example when dialling an international number, tap the [Pause] key between the identification number of an international telephone service company (e.g., "001") and the country code (e.g., "81" for Japan) to insert a pause for smoother line connection.
PAGE 460
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-7) BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are described below. Select the method that best suits your needs. To fax a large number of sheet originals: Use the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 461
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission) • When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled. ► WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-28) • The line of the machine will be busy if another fax is being sent, received, or if the machine is in the busy state. • Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
PAGE 462
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS ORIGINAL ORIENTATION When an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it is transmitted in that orientation ( ) without being rotated. Send A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Rotated to A4R (8-1/2" x 11") orientation A4R (8-1/2" x 11") image is transmitted.
PAGE 463
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGE If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width. Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios Transmitted image width Receiving machine's paper width Reduced size Scaling A3 (11" x 17") B4 B4 1:0.8 A3 (11" x 17") A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.7 B4 A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.
PAGE 464
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be attempted again automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the transmission will be cancelled. Wait for a brief period and then try sending the fax again. To cancel transmission: Do so from the job status screen.
PAGE 465
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time, transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. Faxes sent by direct transmission or manual transmission are not automatically resent. To cancel transmission: Do so from the job status screen.
PAGE 466
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODE This mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax is sent to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. Set it in setting mode. If a fax is sent while this function is enabled, an address confirmation message will appear when the [Start] key is tapped. The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination. After tapping the [Speaker] key while "Fax Dest.
PAGE 467
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Destination specified using the numeric keys With "Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode" enabled, and "Require Re-entry when Directly Entering the Fax Destination" enabled Tap the [Start] key to display the confirmation message. Tap the [OK] key, re-enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap the [Enter Address] key. If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will begin. If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message will appear.
PAGE 468
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and send the data by the memory transmission function.
PAGE 469
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS • Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 4-30)". • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number is recorded in the transaction report and image sending activity report and can be used to check fax jobs.
PAGE 470
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Specify the destination fax number, and tap [Direct TX] on the action panel. Sending History Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Call Search Number Auto Resolution Super Fine Direct TX Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Heavy Paper Scan Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 471
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission function. • If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed.
PAGE 472
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Original A4 Place Fax nextNumber original. (Pg.No.1) Address Press [Start]. When finished, press [Read-End]. History Preview A beep sounds. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. Direct Entry Change Setting CA Tap the [Read-End] key. Detail Read-End Start To cancel scanning: Tap the [CA] key before the [Read-End] key is tapped. • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
PAGE 473
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data. When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.
PAGE 474
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 4 Specify the destination fax number. • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-12 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 • Only one destination can be specified. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used. • The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book.
PAGE 475
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established. • If a person answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak. • When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory. • A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
PAGE 476
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) You can send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation when, for example, sending a report to branch offices in different regions. This function is called "Broadcasting". One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs.
PAGE 477
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS • Prohibit Broadcast In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Disable Fax Broadcasting]. • Sending the same image sent in Fax mode In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Sending the same image sent in Fax mode].
PAGE 478
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS To cancel a specified destination: Select the address you want to cancel in the address list screen, and tap the [Delete] key. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.
PAGE 479
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Print Job Address Scan Fax Set Time Internet Fax Pages Status 10:50 07/07 0001 Broadcast 10:45 07/07 0002/0002 0001/0005 OK Broadcast 10:40 07/07 0002/0002 0001/0005 OK 27 10:35 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:30 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:25 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:20 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:15 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:10 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 0001/0005 OK Check Details of Selected Job Print Image Sending Activity Report Back Afte
PAGE 480
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER (PC-Fax) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.
PAGE 481
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. Send 2-Sided Original Two pages are sent as a single page (N-Up) • 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed. • You cannot use 2-sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.
PAGE 482
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS AUTO DETECTION When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is shown as the "Scan Size" and the transmission size is shown as the "Send Size" in the initial screen.
PAGE 483
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Tap the [Scan Size] key.
PAGE 484
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key.
PAGE 485
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 486
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Dual Page Scan Address Fax Number Divide into 2 Pages N-Up Scan Size Put Multiple Pages in A Page Store/Delete Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size.
PAGE 487
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab.
PAGE 488
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 489
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Dual Page Scan Address Fax Number Divide into 2 Pages N-Up Original Put Multiple Pages in A Page Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Scan Size Send Size Auto A4 2-Sided Tablet Heavy Paper Scan Scan Heavy Paper Original 100% Auto A4 Image Orientation Preview CA Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted.
PAGE 490
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE EXPOSURE The exposure can be changed to suit the darkness of the original. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when "Job Build" or "Preview Setting" in "Others" is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.
PAGE 491
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE RESOLUTION The resolution can be specified to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and the darkness of the image. Resolution settings Resolution Suggestion Standard Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual). Fine Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
PAGE 492
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FAX RECEPTION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-7) RECEIVING A FAX RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. • When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory transmission mode.
PAGE 493
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION The faxes are printed automatically. 2 When printing ends, the Data Notification indicator turns off. When the job separator (upper tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed. If a PIN Code entry screen appears: A PIN Code is registered to print the received fax data. When the correct PIN Code is entered, the received fax is printed.
PAGE 494
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY A fax can be received manually using the touch panel (manually). • When answering the telephone by tapping the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the voice of the caller, but you will not be able to speak. • You can receive a fax after answering a call on an extension telephone. Remote reception can also be used to receive a fax.
PAGE 495
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Receive Settings Set how the machine operates when faxes are received. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings]. Number of Calls in Auto Reception This setting is used to select the number of rings on which the machine automatically receives a call and begins fax reception in auto reception mode. The "Number of Calls in Auto Reception" that can be set in each country are shown in the following table.
PAGE 496
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding When a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax, the received fax can be forwarded to another fax machine. This setting is used to program the fax number of the destination fax machine. Only one forwarding fax number can be programmed (maximum of 64 digits). To insert a pause between digits of the number, tap the [-] key.
PAGE 497
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Allow/Reject Number Setting Use this setting to specify whether reception from a stored number is to be allowed or rejected. Item Settings Rejected Reject reception from the stored number. Allow Reception Allow reception from the stored number. All Invalid Even if numbers have been stored, disregard the numbers and allow reception from all numbers. Add New Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed.
PAGE 498
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received. Sending History Address Book Address Received data is stored. Enter PIN code via the 10-key.
PAGE 499
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION • To display the received data list screen after entering the PIN Code: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting]. • To transfer received data to another machine: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings].
PAGE 500
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function can be used when "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled*. * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 501
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Displays the received data image. Store Data in Folder Cancel All • Tap mode. to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting • To delete a received image, tap [Delete] on the action panel.
PAGE 502
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. Store a recipient by selecting [Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding (page 4-59)] in Setting mode. When printing ends, the Data Notification indicator turns off.
PAGE 503
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 3 Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding. If a PIN Code entry screen appears, the "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding. ► PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) (page 4-61) SETTINGS BEFORE FORWARDING Select [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)].
PAGE 504
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to a fax address, Internet fax address, e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. The machine Forward Received Data Configure all forwarding settings for received faxes in setting mode (Web version).
PAGE 505
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to . • Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disabling of Forward Condition Change Specify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled.
PAGE 506
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION When selecting senders from the "Sender Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders. 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox of the desired day of the week.
PAGE 507
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 14 Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in "Settings (Web version)". 15 From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition]. 16 From the forwarding table, select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.]. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9.
PAGE 508
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S LOCAL DRIVE (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's local drive. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail. Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive The machine View Received Data • Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data
PAGE 509
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Settings for saving received faxes to the local drive 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings] (administrator rights are required). • Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.
PAGE 510
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [Forward to Other Address]. • Tap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode. Store Data in Folder • Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
PAGE 511
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED DATA You can save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. Received data in the memory Stored in the document filing folder Store When data is received, 1 is shown at the top of the screen.
PAGE 512
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION OTHERS FUNCTION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-7) The following functionality is the same as scanner functionality. For detailed explanations, see the explanation in the scanner/internet fax chapter.
PAGE 513
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION STORING FAX OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month.
PAGE 514
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 1 2 3 Place the original. According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Tap [Call Program] on the action panel. Address Book Address Fax Number Tap the desired program key. Change Name Delete Call Program Call registered settings when touched.
PAGE 515
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION OPERATING FAX TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION REMOTELY CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION (POLLING) When you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called "Polling". The document reception from another machine is called "Polling Reception". You can enter multiple destination numbers. When you enter multiple destination numbers, the document is received by polling in the sequence you have entered the destination numbers.
PAGE 516
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 1 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-12 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 • Multiple fax numbers can be entered (maximum of 500). • Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered.
PAGE 517
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. • Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function. • This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling). • The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
PAGE 518
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDER-RELATED FEATURES ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (FAX OWN NUMBER SENDING) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit. Outside scanned image (factory default setting) Load Sender information Sender information Originals Originals The transmitted image length will be length of sender information + length of original image.
PAGE 519
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION • To set the date and time: In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Clock Adjust]. • To store a sender name and sender fax number: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Name and Destination Set] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration]. When you use the Own Number Setting, always configure this information.
PAGE 520
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 3 4 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-12 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Own Name Select] key. Tap the sender information key to specify the sender information.
PAGE 521
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
PAGE 522
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION To cancel the transaction report setting: Tap the [Do not Print] key. • The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows: •"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails. •"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails. •"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report. • Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to report.
PAGE 523
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION POLLING MEMORY FUNCTIONS SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
PAGE 524
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box). If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document. Disables all types of memory box registration.
PAGE 525
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 7 8 Tap the [Once] key or [Unlimited] key to specify the number of times. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. After the settings are completed, tap and . Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A preview of the image will appear in the touch panel when the original is scanned. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
PAGE 526
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. 1 2 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel. If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased. 5 Tap the [Yes] key.
PAGE 527
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-7) F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE COMMUNICATION This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code.
PAGE 528
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION How F-codes work A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving machine, reception will not take place. The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "Sub Address" and "Passcode".
PAGE 529
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE DIALLING When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code (sub-address and passcode) together with the fax number in a one-touch key or group key.
PAGE 530
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program. The F-code confidential transmission cannot be registered as a "Favorite" item. 1 2 Place the original.
PAGE 531
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION When an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the PIN Code. • Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue. • The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed.
PAGE 532
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 6 Received Data List Sender Check Image Received DateStatus 10:45 07/07 Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Print All Received Data Forward to Other Address Not Checked Delete File Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel.
PAGE 533
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. 2 Specify the destination. (1) Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys. (2) Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol "/" is entered. (3) Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys. (4) Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol "/" is entered.
PAGE 534
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in your machine. Otherwise, transmission will not take place.
PAGE 535
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Confidential Change Number of Times Polling Memory Folder Name Times Public Box Once Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. CA Back A4 reception memory A4 100% Start 5 Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. 6 Tap [Change Number of Times] on the action panel, and set the polling times. 7 To erase the original after its transmission, tap the [Once] key.
PAGE 536
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box. A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted. By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically. 1 2 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
PAGE 537
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document. No original can be deleted from the memory box during communication. 1 2 3 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel.
PAGE 538
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES This function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines. When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges.
PAGE 539
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 2 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Specify the destination.
PAGE 540
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box. Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically.
PAGE 541
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-Code Memory Box Create in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box]. Storing a memory box When you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be stored for all functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast). Editing and deleting a memory box When you select a memory box from the list, the edit screen appears for the box.
PAGE 542
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONE You can connect an existing telephone to the machine. The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the extension telephone as shown below. After connecting an extension telephone, configure the "External Telephone Setting" in setting mode (administrator).
PAGE 543
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION) Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone. Dial [5], [*] and [*] buttons of the external telephone. If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals.
PAGE 544
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS FAX JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read the "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)".
PAGE 545
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS Retry jobs A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list. Transmission of the retry job starts according to the [Recall in Case of Line Busy] setting in "Settings". When the transmission is completed, the retry job moves to the completed job list and the status changes to "Send OK". Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
PAGE 546
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description Yes The transaction was completed normally. G3 Communication took place in G3 mode. ECM Communication took place in G3 ECM mode. SG3 Communication took place in Super G3 mode. Forward The received data was forwarded. No Response No response from the receiving party. Busy Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
PAGE 547
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX 5-7 NETWORK SCANNER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 • EASY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 • NORMAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE . . . . . . 5-9 Functions you can use in Easy Scan mode • CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE . . .
PAGE 548
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX OTHER FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST SKEWED PDF SCAN DATA (PDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119 • PDF FORMATS THAT CAN USE PDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119 STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) . . . . 5-70 SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) . . . • SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 549
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS. . . 5-147 SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY. . . • METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) . . . . . • SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 550
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER The network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on your PC.
PAGE 551
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Data entry mode In data entry mode, information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format. Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function. The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.
PAGE 552
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER • To store the sender's name and e-mail address that are used when a sender is not selected: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Reply.Address Set]. • Before using Internet fax: Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".
PAGE 553
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed. To scan an image to your computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer. To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Shapdesk Installation Guide". When a standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
PAGE 554
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NETWORK SCANNER MODE Network scanner mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most image send jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for network scanner mode. 1st screen The original size is displayed.
PAGE 555
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER • To select a function in easy mode In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Scan].
PAGE 556
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE First, to place the machine in a desired image send mode, tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Enter the destination.
PAGE 557
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 3 Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, file format, and other items. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
PAGE 558
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER If paper misfeeds in the automatic document feeder See "AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127)" and make sure that the original is loaded correctly. The following two patterns can be set for scanning when a document is misfed. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Quick On Line Sending].
PAGE 559
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER OCR When the file format is PDF, characters in a scanned image are recognized and added to the PDF as text information. Black & White Colour/Greyscale Specified Pages per File Compression Mode None, MH (G3), MMR (G4) Compression Ratio Low, Medium, High Bk Letter Emphasis (Disabled), (Disabled), (Enabled) (Enabled) Number of Pages (1 to 99) When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, [Specified Pages per File] cannot be selected.
PAGE 560
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES The following original sizes can be transmitted Minimum original size Maximum original size Using the automatic document feeder 131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width) (5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)) 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width) (11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)) Using the document glass - 297 mm (height) x 432 mm* (width) (11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)) *A long original can be transmi
PAGE 561
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination. If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one-touch key. Tapping the key will retrieve all the stored destinations. The address book screen shows all destinations used in each mode.
PAGE 562
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 1 Tap the [Address Book] key.
PAGE 563
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS If you select an incorrect destination: Tap the key again to cancel the selection. • To select a destination from the transmission log, tap the [Sending History] key. ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND (page 5-26) • To check the entered destinations, tap the [Address Review] key. ► VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-19) • The destination for transmission can be selected by tapping a stored destination.
PAGE 564
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS MY ADDRESS My Address is the user's own e-mail address, and is the e-mail address that has been registered in the user list. My Address can be used when login by login name / password is enabled in user authentication. Use this address when you want to send a scanned image to your own e-mail address. In E-mail mode, [Find My Address] appears on the action panel to let you immediately find and use My Address.
PAGE 565
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination). Tap the [Address Review] key.
PAGE 566
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Global Address Search Address Book Address Touch to input Address Sending History Subject File Name Specified by System Settings Tap [Call Search Number] on the action panel.
PAGE 567
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY • Prohibit sending when the fax number or address is manually entered In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Direct Entry]. Prohibit manual entry of fax numbers and addresses.
PAGE 568
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS To enter text, see the "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)". • You can select [Bcc] if [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Bcc Setting] → [Enable Bcc] is enabled in [System Settings]. • When you want to display Bcc address on the job status screen or address list tab, [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Bcc Setting] → [Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen] is enabled in [System Settings].
PAGE 569
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Tap the key of the network folder. Network Folder \\Server3 After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 1. Tap the [OK] key again to accept the destination.
PAGE 570
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK When an LDAP server is configured in the "Settings (Web version)", look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses). In normal mode, you can add an address retrieved by searching to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
PAGE 571
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 3 Enter Initials Item Search Start CA Target Name Local Drive/ USB Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. B/W Start Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address]. Colour Start How to search Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters.
PAGE 572
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses), and/or fax are stored. Select one of these to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log.
PAGE 573
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Tap the key of the destination to resend. Delete All Histories Select Address to Send Again. Direct Entry 123 The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information. Direct Entry 456 Direct Entry 789 Preview CA Start To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
PAGE 574
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING ONLY THE URL OF A SCANNED FILE TO A SCAN DESTINATION When using Scan to E-mail, some originals and/or scan settings may result in a large file. When the file is large, there is a risk that the e-mail server may reject the file and it will not be sent. This function saves the scanned file on the machine's local drive, and sends an e-mail providing only the file's URL information to the recipient.
PAGE 575
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS Sending only a URL to the recipient Using easy mode When [Enable Send Destination Link as Default] is enabled in the settings (administrator), the scanned data is saved in the machine's local drive, and URL information is sent to the e-mail destination. When disabled, scanned data is sent by regular Scan to E-mail. This function enable/disable cannot be changed in the easy mode screen.
PAGE 576
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS • To use this function Configure in "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Send Destination Link Settings]. • To always use this function in easy mode Configure in "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Enable Send Destination Link as Default].
PAGE 577
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE An image can be sent in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder). • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
PAGE 578
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 2 Specify the destination.
PAGE 579
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place. • If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to step 6.
PAGE 580
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION Change the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. • When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
PAGE 581
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Global Address Search Address Book Address Touch to input Address Sending History Subject File Name Call Search Number Specified by System Settings Colour Mode Verification Stamp Options Auto/Mono2 Resolution Call Program Call Registered settings 200x200dpi Send Destination Link File Format PDF Original Preview Auto Auto 100% A4 Others CA Send Size Scan Size Exposure To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box.
PAGE 582
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 9 Enter the body text. Sending History Address Book Address Touch to input Address After the settings are completed, tap Body Entry Pre-Set Select . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. Clear All CA Edit Others To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key.
PAGE 583
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE Transmits a fax in Internet Fax mode. This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP. • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When all originals have been scanned, the message "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
PAGE 584
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Specify the destination.
PAGE 585
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. • If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. • Tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned.
PAGE 586
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap a pre-set text key. Others Subject Clear Direct Entry No.1 AAA No.2 BBB No.3 CCC No.4 DDD Preview CA No.5 EEE Start Back reception memory: : 100% Receive To cancel the selection of the subject: Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the subject and tap the [OK] key. 5 6 To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box. Tap a pre-set text key.
PAGE 587
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Enter the body text. Others After the settings are completed, tap Body Entry Pre-Set Select Clear All . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. CA Edit Back reception memory 100% Receive To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key.
PAGE 588
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) Send the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.
PAGE 589
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 1 Place the original. 2 Specify all destinations. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 590
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key ([Start] key in normal mode) to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page at a time.
PAGE 591
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE When Internet Fax addresses are included When Internet Fax addresses are included in the destinations, the following restrictions apply. Colour Mode File format (file compression mode) Original Background Adjustment Fixed at black & white binary. Fixed at TIFF. Transmission will take place to all addresses using the same image width as Internet Fax. Cannot be set.
PAGE 592
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations. 1 2 Tap the job status display. Print Job Scan Fax Internet Fax Enter Plural Selection Mode Back Address Set Time Pages Status Tap the [Scan] tab or [Internet Fax] tab, and tap the [Complete] key.
PAGE 593
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending Details Back Number: Address Start Time 001 aaa@aaa.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Status 002 bbb@bbb.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Failed After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] on the action panel to resend the image. All Destinations The steps to follow after [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used.
PAGE 594
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC (PC-I-FAX) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as an Internet fax.
PAGE 595
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IMAGE SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. Scan transmission 2-Sided Original Front and reverse sides are scanned The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed. You cannot use 2-Sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.
PAGE 596
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (ENLARGE/REDUCE) When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is indicated as the "Scan Size", and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the "Send Size".
PAGE 597
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 598
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 599
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 600
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Size Scan Thin Paper Original Store/Delete Heavy Paper Scan Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Scan Heavy Paper Original Tap a key that does not show a size.
PAGE 601
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab.
PAGE 602
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. • The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.
PAGE 603
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Original Scan Thin Paper Original Heavy Paper Scan Scan Heavy Paper Original Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto A4 Auto A4 Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 604
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE Optimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original. • When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the exposure setting each time you change pages. • The contrast for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings.
PAGE 605
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Scan mode or Data entry mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Exposure] key. 3 Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type. 4 ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-13) Address Book Address Touch to input Address Background Adjustment Resolution E-mail/Exposure Specify density of image to send. Change Sending Resolution 1 3 5 Auto File Format Tap to adjust the exposure.
PAGE 606
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION Specify the resolution setting. How to select the resolution For normal text originals, 200 x 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible.
PAGE 607
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE Change the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed. The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each.
PAGE 608
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE • The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can change the format at the time of transmission. • If [PDF/Encry.] is specified for the file format, the password entry screen appears when scanning. Enter a password with up to 32 characters. Note the following when [PDF/High] is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format.
PAGE 609
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Tap the key of the desired file type. After the settings are completed, tap . When the [B/W] key is selected When the [Colour/Greyscale] key is selected File Format File Format Colour/ Greyscale B/W TIFF CA 4 Preview XPS TIFF JPEG XPS PDF PDF/A-1a PDF/A-1b PDF PDF/A-1a PDF/A-1b DOCX XLSX PPTX DOCX XLSX PPTX RTF TXT(UTF-8) Prog. RTF TXT(UTF-8) Prog.
PAGE 610
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 7 Tap the [Colour/Greyscale] or [B/W] tab and select the format mode for scanning. • The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Mono2]. • The format setting for [Colour/Greyscale] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Full Colour] or [Greyscale]. 8 Tap the key of the desired file type.
PAGE 611
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 11 To change the number of pages per file, set the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox to , and use numeric keys to specify the number of pages per file. • When the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is , one file is created for each of the number of pages at the right. When the checkmark is removed, one file is created for all pages. • When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
PAGE 612
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE The format for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings. ► Internet Fax Settings (page 8-70) CHANGING COLOUR MODE Change the colour mode used to scan the original. In Easy mode Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key when scanning the original.
PAGE 613
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap the [Greyscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic colour selection. Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale. After the settings are completed, tap . The B/W mode can be set only when the [Auto] key is selected in the colour mode setting (step 3).
PAGE 614
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SETTING SCAN SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY (Auto Set) To automatically set scan settings appropriate for the original, tap the [Auto Set] key in the base screen of Easy Mode. Original Address E-mail Address A4 Original Resolution 2-Sided Auto Detail File Format Blank Page Skip PDF Auto PDF CA Preview Auto Set B/W Start Colour Start The following functions are set automatically.
PAGE 615
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Check the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a better quality original to the destination.
PAGE 616
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS Fax mode details cautions for functions such as N-Up Printing that have the same operating procedures as fax mode. STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
PAGE 617
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping of the [Speaker] key • Quick File • File • Page changes and unspecified erases during preview • Reply to/Add 'Reply to' to Cc • Metadata Settings • Own Name • Sign E-mail • Encrypt E-mail • Up to 48 programs can be stored.
PAGE 618
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
PAGE 619
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
PAGE 620
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key.
PAGE 621
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) Scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original. B4(8-1/2" x 14") B4(8-1/2" x 14") A3(11" x 17") A3(11" x 17") This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below.
PAGE 622
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key.
PAGE 623
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. Transmitted image Originals Front Back Transmission Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size portrait scan transmission Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size landscape scan transmission • If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.
PAGE 624
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. Background Adjustment Others Colour Mode Card Shot Contrast Adjust Contrast of Image Y 54 Off ( 25~210 ) mm After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Drop Out Colour On Remove Chromatic colour X 86 Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required.
PAGE 625
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SIMULTANEOUSLY SCANNING MULTIPLE CARDS, RECEIPTS OR OTHER SMALL ORIGINALS TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (MULTICROP) This function automatically crops and scans multiple cards, receipts, or other small originals placed on the document glass to individual files. • This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device.
PAGE 626
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the mode display and change to the base screen of the desired mode. 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multicrop] key.
PAGE 627
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A BUSINESS CARD, READING THE TEXT STRING, CREATING A FILE, AND SENDING THE FILE (BUSINESS CARD SCAN) You can scan a business card, extract the name and telephone number from the text string read by OCR, and create and send a vCard or other file. Send vCard file or CSV file This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device.
PAGE 628
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Place the multiple business cards that you want to scan in the document tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. 1 ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-126) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-130) Cautions when placing business cards on the document glass • Up to 20 business cards can be placed at once. • Separate the business cards by at least 5 mm. • Available business card sizes are 45 x 85 mm to 110 x 110 mm.
PAGE 629
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Business Card Scan] key.
PAGE 630
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next group of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds. The image of the scanned business card is sent together with the VCard or CSV file set in File Format.
PAGE 631
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS File names The user can assign any file name to a file. When [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name] is enabled, the name on a scanned business card can be assigned as the file name. If you do not set a file name, the machine will assign an automatically generated file name. File name rules File names are assigned as follows in each setting. Setting User entry File name auto extraction Automatic generation File File name vCard User_0001.vcf User_0002.
PAGE 632
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MULTIPLE PHOTOS AT ONCE TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (Image Crop) This function automatically scans photographs placed on the document glass to individual files. This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device. Settings (administrator) -"Image Send Settings"→"Scan Settings"→"Condition Settings"→"If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.
PAGE 633
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Image Crop] key.
PAGE 634
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (JOB BUILD) This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 635
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Job Build] key.
PAGE 636
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. When in fax mode, if no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. To change the time until automatic send: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Job Auto Start Time During Scanning].
PAGE 637
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document. When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass. Book or bound document Original scan size The left and right pages are sent as two pages.
PAGE 638
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Place the original on the document glass. 1 ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . When in fax mode, then after completing this procedure, proceed to Step 3. Size mark Centreline of B4 original Centreline of A3 original Centreline of 11" x 17" original The page on this side is scanned first. Centreline of original 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
PAGE 639
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS To cancel the dual page scan setting Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to uncheck it. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
PAGE 640
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto]. The document glass is not available for this function.
PAGE 641
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key. Blank Page Skip Others Skip Blank Page in Original Book Divide Select Original Binding Edge. Erase Erase Shadow Around Background Adjustment Off Resolution Change Sending Resolution Left Binding Colour Mode Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. After the settings are completed, tap sequence.
PAGE 642
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING COLOURS AND SHADING ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter. Adjust light areas in this way. Level [-] This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original.
PAGE 643
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. File Format Others Select File Format Sharpness Background Adjustment Adjust Original Background Darkness. Adjust Outline of Image Contrast Adjust Contrast of Image Off -3 0 3 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode On Touch [+] darken background. Touch [-] erase background.
PAGE 644
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (CONTRAST) Contrast is added for a clear image. Blurry original This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 645
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Sharpness Others Adjust Outline of Image Resolution Contrast Change Sending Resolution Exposure Specify Send Exposure Off 1 2 3 4 5 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode On Low High Preview Tap or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level. and [Back] keys in CA Start Back To cancel the contrast settings: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 646
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (SHARPNESS) Blurry outlined original Enhance the outline before transmitting. This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.
PAGE 647
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Contrast Others Adjust Contrast of Image Resolution Sharpness Change Sending Resolution Exposure Specify Send Exposure After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode Off 1 2 3 4 5 On Less Sharp More Sharp Preview Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. and [Back] keys in CA Start Back To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 648
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (DROP OUT COLOUR) This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Drop Out colour] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 649
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 650
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE (RGB Adjust) This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R (Red)+ G (Green)+ B (Blue)+ 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 651
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 652
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE) When scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image. Scanning a thick book Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear here Shadows appear in the image. No shadows appear.
PAGE 653
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When in fax mode, then after completing this procedure, proceed to Step 3.
PAGE 654
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Specify the erase width. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys. • To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with To cancel the erase setting: Tap the [Clear] key. 7 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 655
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL (SLOW SCAN MODE) Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D When Slow Scan Mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible. 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. When in fax mode, then after completing this procedure, proceed to Step 3.
PAGE 656
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Sending History Job Build Slow Scan Mode Heavy Paper Scan Mixed Size Original Original Count Erase Call Search Number Verification Stamp Program Registration Card Shot Dual Page Scan Book Divide Multicrop Business Card Scan Timer Verif.
PAGE 657
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A HEAVY ORIGINAL (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) Use this function when you wish to scan heavy originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent heavy originals from misfeeding. A 1 A B C D B C D Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. When in fax mode, then after completing this procedure, proceed to Step 3. Adjust the original guides slowly.
PAGE 658
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Sending History Job Build Slow Scan Mode Heavy Paper Scan Mixed Size Original Original Count Erase Call Search Number Verification Stamp Program Registration Card Shot Dual Page Scan Book Divide Multicrop Business Card Scan Timer Verif.
PAGE 659
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSION (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to send only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original. Blank page Do not transmit blank pages. Transmission • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.
PAGE 660
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. Dual Page Scan Others Divide into 2 Pages Original Blank Page Skip Erase Erase Shadow Around After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode Off Exposure Specify Send Exposure and [Back] keys in Skip Blank Page Skip Blank and Back Shadow Preview CA Start Back To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting: Tap the [Off] key.
PAGE 661
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT) Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes. • The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
PAGE 662
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended. Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-69)" (When in fax mode, "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 4-30)"). However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
PAGE 663
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. Position of stamp 1 Originals 1 An "O" mark is stamped in fluorescent pink. Originals are scanned • To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed. • When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
PAGE 664
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] key. The appropriate icon or checkbox is selected. If you tap the [Others] key, tap the [Back] key after the settings have been completed. To cancel the verification stamp setting: Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or the [Others] key, and tap [Verif. Stamp] to clear the checkmark. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 665
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST SKEWED PDF SCAN DATA (PDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT) When the original is skewed, or when images within the original are skewed, this automatically corrects the skewing, and saves as a PDF format document. PDF FORMATS THAT CAN USE PDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT All PDF formats can use this function. PDF format PDF, Encrypt PDF, Compact PDF, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine), Encry.
PAGE 666
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Specify the destination.
PAGE 667
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender address, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of the file you transmit. This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode. Example of the sender information printed (1) (2) (3) (4) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine. Source Address.
PAGE 668
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
PAGE 669
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the key of the print settings. Others After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Transaction Report Do not Print and [Back] keys in Print at Error Always Print Preview CA Print Original Image Start Back reception memory 100% Receive To cancel the transaction report settings: Tap the [Do not Print] key.
PAGE 670
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION) Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.
PAGE 671
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key. 5 Tap [On] key.
PAGE 672
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys. • It is convenient to use to finely adjust the time. • The setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CA] key to cancel the operation.
PAGE 673
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A SIGNATURE WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE (ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE) You can add a signature when sending a scanned image. This allows the recipient to check your sender information in the electronic signature. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To add an electronic signature to a scanned image • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
PAGE 674
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 675
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENCRYPTING THE TRANSMITTED DATA (ENCRYPTION) You can encrypt the transmitted data to strengthen security. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To encrypt transmitted data • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
PAGE 676
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 677
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY LOG PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS Print a log of recent image sending activities (date, name of destination, time required, result, and other items). The Image Sending Activity Report contains information that is useful in dealing with problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
PAGE 678
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed. Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description OK The transaction was completed normally.
PAGE 679
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLY The Internet fax function periodically connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed. In the default setting, this function checks for reception once every five minutes.
PAGE 680
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
PAGE 681
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME Print received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory. • If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.
PAGE 682
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 683
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Select Image to Operate. Return to Received Data List Print Forward to Other Address Delete File Erase Specified Range Select All Page Tap the image you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel. The machine starts printing the image. • [Select All Page]: Selects all displayed images. • [Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All Page". • / : Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image.
PAGE 684
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded to another previously registered Internet fax address (including direct SMTP). • Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
PAGE 685
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) Received Internet faxes are automatically forwarded to a fax destination number, an Internet fax address, an e-mail address, a file server address, a desktop address, or a network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. Forwarding Received Data In setting mode (Web version), configure the inbound routing settings.
PAGE 686
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the "Settings (Web version)". 4 Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button. The sender address or number you entered will be added to the "Address to be Entered" list.
PAGE 687
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox ( ) of the desired day of the week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding Time] checkbox ( ) and specify the time.
PAGE 688
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 16 Select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.] from the forwarding table. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 9, set the forwarding permission settings. • To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
PAGE 689
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS How to save received faxes to the local drive 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (Administrator rights required.) 2 Select [Allowed] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Submit] button.
PAGE 690
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.
PAGE 691
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS SAVING RECEIVED DATA Save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 692
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a scanner mode job, select the [Scan] tab. To check the status of an Internet fax job, select the [Internet Fax] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)".
PAGE 693
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays "Send OK". However, Internet Fax jobs such as reception, timer transmission, retries, and forwarding are displayed in the job status screen as follows: Reception job During Internet Fax receiving, the status field displays "Receiving" in the job queue list.
PAGE 694
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE You can install the scanner driver on your computer and use a TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer. Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of multiple originals.
PAGE 695
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) 10:15 2 Program List (Image Send) Toner Quantity Bk C M Y If the [PC Scan] mode icon does not appear, tap move the screen. PC Scan Operation Guide Tap the [PC Scan] mode icon to switch to PC Scan mode. Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Brightness Adjustment to Job Status When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no other keys can be used.
PAGE 696
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) Preview the image. 6 (1) Select the location where the original is placed. "Scanning Source" menu: • If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)]. • If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or [SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the original is a book-style or tablet-style original.
PAGE 697
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) Select scanning settings while viewing the image. 7 [Rotate] button: Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90 degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image without picking up and placing the original again. The image file will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview window. [Image Size] button: Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical values.
PAGE 698
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) [At the machine] 9 10:15 This machine is in the PC scan mode. Do not remove the original. Tap the [Exit] key. Scanner IP address:0.0.0.0 Program List (Image Send) Exit Toner Quantity Bk C M Y 10 Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Brightness Adjustment Job Status 10:15 PC scan in progress. Finish PC scan mode? Tap the [Yes] key.
PAGE 699
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated for sending a scanned image. The metadata file is created in XML format.
PAGE 700
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) To configure the settings related to metadata, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Metadata Settings] → [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (administrator)". (Administrator rights are required.) Enable metadata delivery. Storing Metadata Sets Store the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set.
PAGE 701
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY TRANSMITTING METADATA TRANSMITTING METADATA Select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery. Metadata delivery is performed using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, perform metadata delivery using document filing in [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (Web version).
PAGE 702
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA FIELDS The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted. • Data automatically generated by the machine These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC. • Previously defined fields These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags.
PAGE 703
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA SETTINGS If the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications. The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata, and edit or delete an existing metadata. • [Add] key Adds a new metadata set. • List Lists the currently stored metadata sets. Metadata Delivery Enables or disables the metadata delivery function.
PAGE 704
Icons DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING. . . . . . . . . . . . • BEFORE USING SCAN TO LOCAL DRIVE IN DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE . . . 6-7 BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE . . .
PAGE 705
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING This function saves the original scanned on the machine, transmitted fax image, or print data from a computer on the local drive of the machine or an external memory device as data. The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required. Editing of the stored files, for example combining, is also possible. A PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer.
PAGE 706
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Uses of document filing Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required. Additionally printing out conference material with the same settings Scanning is not necessary. No settings are necessary.
PAGE 707
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Quick File Folder Documents scanned using [Quick File] on the action panel are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically assigned to each job. Main Folder Scanned documents are stored in this folder. When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name. A password (4 to 32 characters) can also be set when storing a file ("Confidential" save) as required.
PAGE 708
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder Examples of original types Full colour original (Text and photo example) Number of pages* Number of files Max. 15000 Size: A4 Black & white original (Text) Max. 5000 Max.
PAGE 709
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Information added to files When saving a file using "File", add the following information to distinguish it from other files. User Name: Name1 File Name: Meeting handout Password: 12345678 "Meeting minutes" folder User Name The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. File Name Names a file. Stored to Specifies a folder to store files.
PAGE 710
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE To use Document Filing, select the action panel for each mode. To save data simultaneously with a copy or fax, tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel in each mode. No.
PAGE 711
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE Use to save a file temporarily. Use to save originals to be shared among users. The folder for the registered user. Use to search for a file in a folder. Folder Select Main Folder My Folder BBB CCC DDD EEE FFF GGG HHH III III JJJ KKK LLL Displayed during user authentication. Tap this key to open the logged-in user's personal screen. Displays the functions available in document filing mode.
PAGE 712
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING FILING WHILE USING ANOTHER MODE QUICK FILE This function allows you to store an original in copy mode or image send mode as an image file in the Quick File folder of the machine. The image file stored in quick file mode can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to copy the document or transmit it in image send mode without having to locate the original.
PAGE 713
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Start a copy or image sending. 3 When the function is executed, the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder. To prevent accidental saving of the file, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key ([Colour Start] key or [B/W Start] key in copy mode) is tapped.
PAGE 714
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 2 Change to normal mode and tap [File] on the action panel to specify the file information. To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see "File Information (page 6-12)".
PAGE 715
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING File Information The procedure for detail settings is described below. Specifying a property, user name, file name, and folder makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when [Confidential] is selected for Property and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission. Changing the property A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function.
PAGE 716
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Specifying a user name 1 Tap the [User Name] text box. When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not necessary. The user name must first be stored by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" → [User List]. 2 Tap the key of the user name.
PAGE 717
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Creating PDF for PC browsing Tap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox to is saved. , and a public PDF for PC browsing will be created when the file Even if using the scanner function "AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST SKEWED PDF SCAN DATA (PDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT) (page 5-119)", correction results will not be reflected.
PAGE 718
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING DOCUMENT DATA ONLY (SCAN TO LOCAL DRIVE) SAVE ON LOCAL DRIVE Storing from Easy Scan 1 10:15 Easy Copy Toner Quantity Easy Scan Bk C M Operation Guide Y Tray Settings Enlarge Display Mode Settings 2 Tap [Local Drive/USB]. 3 Place the original. 4 Sharp OSA Total Count Brightness Adjustment Job Status Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 719
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 6 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended. Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [File Retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to Local Drive] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 720
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING DEFAULT SETTING FOR SCAN SAVE In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Image Orientation], [Default Colour Mode Settings], [Default Exposure Settings], [Default Original Image Type], [Initial Resolution Setting], [Default Output Tray], [Erase Width Adjustment] and [Card Shot Settings]. Image Orientation Changes the image orientation.
PAGE 721
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE Prohibit saving to an external memory device In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Storing to External Memory Device]. Disables to store to the external memory device.
PAGE 722
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [File Retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to External Memory Device] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-131) File Name: Check the file name and save location, and tap keys for any settings you want to select.
PAGE 723
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Scan to USB memory device Connect the USB memory device to the machine. 1 2 10:15 10:15 External memory device (USB) is connected.
PAGE 724
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Check the [Sending data has been completed.] message, and remove the USB memory device from the machine.
PAGE 725
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES USING STORED FILES SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE The screens and procedures differ depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled. The sequence for using a stored file depending on the situation is explained. For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-30)". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control (page 1-38)".
PAGE 726
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Document Output Options The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored. The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine. Item Settings Copy For each mode, select whether or not copying of stored files is allowed. Print For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed.
PAGE 727
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SELECTION SCREEN The file selection screen can be displayed in "List" format or "Thumbnail" format to display thumbnail images of files. List display mode Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail. Switch the file key displayed for each job type. Search for a file saved in a folder. Return to the base screen of document filing mode. Displays the saved files.
PAGE 728
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [File Retrieve] key. 1 When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is configured by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" → [User List], the custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. 2 Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file.
PAGE 729
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Quick printing Prints a file with the various settings used when it was saved. Select a file and tap the [Print Now] key. To delete data after printing, set the [Delete] checkbox to . To print the file in black and white, select the [B/W Print] checkbox . To change the number of sheets to print, tap the [Copies] key and then use the numeric keys to set the number to print.
PAGE 730
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES MULTI-FILE PRINTING MULTI-FILE PRINTING 1 Select the keys of the multiple files that you wish to print. • Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files. • A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder. • If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen is changed by selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled.
PAGE 731
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES BATCH PRINTING Batch Print Settings In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Batch Print Settings]. Set whether or not the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key are prohibited in the user name selection screen when printing all files, whether files are sorted by date in newest or oldest order, and whether file names are sorted in ascending or descending order.
PAGE 732
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 8 Tap the [Start] key to start printing. If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen. It [Delete the Data] on the action panel is tapped, all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted.
PAGE 733
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE TRANSMISSION The settings used when the file was stored with document filing are stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the transmission settings to modify the retrieved file. After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 6-25) • A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be transmitted in colour. • A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
PAGE 734
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MOVING Changes the file storage location. (The file is moved to another folder.) A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 6-25) 1 Main Folder All Files File Name User Name Tap [Move] on the action panel.
PAGE 735
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES DELETE FILE Stored files that are no longer required can be deleted. A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 6-25) 1 Main Folder File Name All Files User Name Tap the [Delete] key.
PAGE 736
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Automatic Deletion of File You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees space on the local drive. Automatic Deletion of File Settings Document filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.
PAGE 737
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE IMAGE CHECKING Scan_02022018_112030 Displays file information. User Unknown A4 A4 A4 Return to File Selection Screen Auto Colour A4 Displays file preview images. Displays the page number. 1 2 3 4 5 5 Enlarge or reduce the preview screen. Displays the total page count. Rotate the preview screen in increments of 90 degrees. • Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.
PAGE 738
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MERGING You can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing. • If you have only selected a single file, the [Combine File] key is not displayed. • The file name is a combination of "the first file name", "a tilde (~)", and "Serial No.". As required, change the file name at a later time. • The files are joined in the selected order. After selecting two desired files, follow the steps below.
PAGE 739
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination. 1 Tap the job status display. Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved, and tap the [Complete] key. 2 3 Tap the key of the desired file from the completed job.
PAGE 740
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL When there are many stored files, it may take some time to locate a file. The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly. Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. As required, a folder can also be specified as a search range.
PAGE 741
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 3 Main Folder All Files Select search conditions. Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Search Select File from Network Folder to Print User Name Login Name Tap each text box and set the search condition. To search for the current folder, set the [Search Just Within the Folder] checkbox to . File or Folder Name PIN Code/Password Date CA Search Just Within the Folder Search Start Print Now 4 [User Name] Search using the user name.
PAGE 742
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE A file stored in the FTP server, USB memory device, or network folder of a PC can be printed. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings. On the action panel, tap [Select File from FTP to Print], [Select File from USB Memory to Print] or [Select File from Network Folder to Print]. For more information, see "PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER (page 3-86)".
PAGE 743
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Search Use these settings to enter search conditions. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”. Item Description User Name Enter the user name. (Up to 32 characters) Select from User List Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. Login Name Set the number of files that are displayed.
PAGE 744
MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE . . . . . . . 7-2 BASE SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE . . . 7-3 PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER . . . . . . . . 7-4 PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 • STAPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 • PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • FOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 745
MANUAL FINISHING►MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING In manual finishing mode, you can set for finish on copied or printed pages. You can select the manual finishing mode if the inserter is installed. When the finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher (large stacker), punch module, or folding unit is installed, finishing operations, such as stapling, punching or folding can be performed.
PAGE 746
MANUAL FINISHING►MANUAL FINISHING BASE SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE Selects a paper tray for finishing. Tap the [Type and Size] key to set the paper type and paper size. Shows the selected paper and output trays. Selects an output tray for finished paper. Output Tray Inserter Upper Tray Upper Tray Plain 1 A3 Middle Tray Lower Tray Plain 1 A3 Lower Tray Type and Size Punch Staple Off Off Staples each set of output. Selects a staple position.
PAGE 747
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER You can check the type and size of paper loaded in the inserter on the display to the right of [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key. The paper size is automatically detected when paper is loaded. To set the paper type and size, tap the [Type and Size] key. Paper types and sizes can be specified for each of the upper and lower trays.
PAGE 748
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION When using the staple, punch or the paper folding function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.
PAGE 749
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS • To use the staple function, you need to mount a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). • To use the saddle stitch function, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). PUNCH Touch panel key Orientation Result A A 2-Hole Punch A A A punch module is required for paper punch.
PAGE 750
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS Touch panel key Orientation Result ABC CA Accordion Fold ABC AC Double Fold A B CD DA A B CD AB D C-Fold Z-Fold • A folding unit is required to be installed in order to use paper folding functions other than saddle folds. • To use the saddle fold function, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
PAGE 751
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING USING MANUAL FINISHING Change from the Home Screen or each mode to manual finishing mode, and carry out the following procedure. ► SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE (page 7-2) Set the guides to the size of the paper. 1 Grasp the guide lock lever to adjust the guide. When you have finished the adjustment, release the lock lever. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" × 11"R, extend the bypass tray all the way out.
PAGE 752
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING 4 Output Tray Inserter Upper Tray Upper Tray Plain A3 Middle Tray Lower Tray Plain A3 Lower Tray Type and Size Staple Punch Off Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2-Hole Punch Saddle Stitch 2 Staples 5 Change the paper tray or output tray as required.
PAGE 753
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING STAPLE FUNCTION When a finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can staple loaded papers into a sheaf. (Staple function) When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can staple papers in two places on the centreline and fold them before being output. (Saddle stitch function) Staple Saddle Stitch 5 1 6 1 • You can use the saddle stitch function for size A4R to A3W (8-1/2" × 11"R to 12" × 18") papers.
PAGE 754
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING COPIES/PAGES FUNCTION If you wish to staple multiple sets at once, use the Copies/Pages. Load sorted paper and tap the [Copies/Pages] key to enter the number of copies and the number of pages per set. ABC ABC AB A A B C A B C A B C The settings on the Copies/Pages will not be effective for the paper folding and punch functions.
PAGE 755
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING If you select [All Pages] for the number of copies/number of pages, specify "1" for the number of sets to be printed. If you set more copies or pages than the number of copies or pages that can be stapled, a message is displayed and the [Start] key is disabled. See "Specifications" in the "Start Guide" and specify the number of copies or pages that can be stapled.
PAGE 756
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PUNCH FUNCTION If a punch module is installed, holes can be punched in paper. A A • Paper sizes that are available for the punch function are B5R to A3 (8-1/2" × 11"R to 11" × 17"). • You cannot use A3W (12" × 18") size papers, and special media such as transparency film. • The punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding functions. However, it can be used with them if the paper size used is A3, B4 or 11" × 17" for Z-fold.
PAGE 757
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PAPER FOLDING FUNCTION When a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold. When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can use saddle folds. The paper sizes that can be selected vary depending on the type of paper fold.
PAGE 758
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING Types of Folds Folding results Paper Size Z-Fold A3, B4, A4R, 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11"R AB D ABCD • Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used. • The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole punch function. However, it can be used with them if the paper size for Z-fold is A3, B4 or 11" × 17". Selecting the paper folding function Tap your desired fold key in the "Fold".
PAGE 759
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING Setting Multiple Fold (when Saddle Fold is selected) 1 Output Tray Inserter Upper Tray Upper Tray Plain 1 A3 Middle Tray Lower Tray Plain 1 A3 Lower Tray Type and Size Punch Staple 2-Hole Punch Saddle Stitch 2 Staples 2 Fold Off Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front With Saddle Fold selected, tap the [Detail] key.
PAGE 760
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAY The paper tray is automatically detected when paper is loaded in the inserter. If you need to specify a paper tray when, for example, paper has been loaded into both the upper and lower trays on the inserter, tap the [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key to specify the appropriate paper tray.
PAGE 761
SETTING MODE • Product Key/Application Number Input. . . . . . . • Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING MODE Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87 • Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87 • Network Name Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90 • Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90 • Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 762
SETTING MODE System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Data Import/Export (CSV Format) . . . . . . . . . . . • Storage Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Device Cloning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Address Book Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Filing Data Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 763
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE SETTING MODE "Settings" allows management of various functions that will make it easier to use the machine, such as default registration for each function, network connection setting, and log check of operation status. Setting mode can also be selected using the Web browser by accessing the machine from a PC connected to the same network as the machine.
PAGE 764
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE Displaying the setting mode (Web version) When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC’s Web browser. From the setting mode of the machine, print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC’s Web browser. Tap the [Settings] key.
PAGE 765
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE WHERE TO FIND EXPLANATIONS OF SETTINGS The setting items below are explained in each of the chapters. To find an explanation of an item, refer to the SETTING MODE LIST (page 8-6). • Address Book • Document Operations • User Control • System Settings • Copy Settings • Printer Settings → Condition Settings • Image Send Settings → Condition Settings • Image Send Settings → Fax Settings → Default Settings, Send Settings, Receive Settings, Allow/Reject Number Setting, Polling Setting.
PAGE 766
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST 3 SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. The setting items below are explained in each of the manual. A→User's Manual (Address Book Registration) B→User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation) • Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings. • Some setting items can only be configured on the Web page.
PAGE 767
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Document Operations U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Yes Yes Page ■ Document Operations*1 ● Document Filing  Main Folder – Yes Yes  Quick File Folder – Yes Yes  Custom Folder*2 – Yes Yes  My Folder*3 – Yes Yes  Search – Yes Yes  File Batch Print – Yes Yes – Yes Yes ● Submit Print Job 6-39 3-92 *1 This setting is configured in setting mode on the web page.
PAGE 768
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes – No Yes  Use Billing Code Disabled No Yes  Default Code Setting usecode No Yes  Remember Billing Code Between Modes Disabled No Yes  Disable Change of Billing Code Disabled No Yes  Apply Default Code when Billing Code not entered Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes ● Billing Code Setting  Administration Settings  Disable Billing Code for Selected Applications • Sharp OSA All Invalid
PAGE 769
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST System Settings Home Screen Settings For information on home screen settings items, see "User's Manual (Touch Panel Operation)".
PAGE 770
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page  Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled No Yes  Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper Disabled No Yes  Disabling Registration of Custom Image Disabled No Yes 2-102  Disabling sending while copying Disabled No Yes 2-136  High Quality Scan from Document Feeder (B/W) Enabled No Yes  Quick Scan from Document Glass (B/W) Disabled No Yes  Auto Clear Before Copy Execution Also
PAGE 771
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page  Text Settings (Stamp) – No Yes 2-99  Custom Stamp – No Yes 2-102  Custom Watermark – No Yes 2-102  Text /Image Printing *1 When a finisher/finisher (large stacker)/saddle stitch finisher/saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed. *2 When a finisher/finisher (large stacker)/saddle stitch finisher/saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed and a punch module is installed.
PAGE 772
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Initial Status Settings U A Yes Yes  Copies 1 Yes Yes  Orientation Portrait Yes Yes  Paper Size A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Yes Yes  Output Tray Auto Yes Yes  Paper Type Plain Paper 1 Yes Yes  Resolution Setting 600dpi (High Quality) Yes Yes  Disable Blank Page Print Enabled Yes Yes  2-Sided Print 1-Sided Yes Yes  Colour Mode Auto Yes Yes  N-Up Print 1-Up Yes Yes  Fit To Page Enabled Yes
PAGE 773
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  E-mail Print Settings U A No Yes  E-mail Print Disabled No Yes  POP3 Server – No Yes  Port Number 110 No Yes  POP Authentication Disabled No Yes  User Name – No Yes  Password – No Yes Disabled No Yes  Check Interval 5 minutes No Yes  Enable SSL Disabled No Yes  Connection Test – No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes • Change Password  Direct Print Settings (FTP)  Direct Print Settings
PAGE 774
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Image Send Settings Common Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page ● Common Settings  Condition Settings  Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Disabled  Job Auto Start Time During Scanning 60sec.
PAGE 775
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Erase Width Adjustment U A No Yes • Edge Clearance Width 10mm (1/2") No Yes • Centre Clearance Width 10mm (1/2") No Yes • Time Specified Output of Received Data Disabled No Yes No Yes Page 5-106 4-62  Enable/Disable Settings  Settings to Disable Registration • Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All Invalid • Disable Registering Destination on Web Page All Invalid No Yes • Disable Registrat
PAGE 776
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Scan Settings Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Auto: Mono2 No Yes Disabled No Yes Auto: Mono2 No Yes Disabled No Yes  Initial File Format Setting No Yes  Scanner Common No Yes PDF No Yes Disabled No Yes • Black & White Compression Mode: MMR (G4) No Yes • Colour/Greyscale Compression Ratio: Medium No Yes - Compression Ratio Middle No Yes - Bk Letter Emphasis Disabled No Yes • Specified Pages per File Disabled No
PAGE 777
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • OCR Setting No Yes - Font No Yes + Western Languages Arial No Yes + Japanese MS Gothic No Yes + Chinese SimSun No Yes + Traditional Chinese MingLiU No Yes + Korean Dotum No Yes - Detect Image Direction Enabled No Yes - File Name Extraction Disabled No Yes No Yes  Easy Scan Settings • Colour Auto No Yes • B/W Mono2 No Yes  Resolution Setting No Yes  Scan No Yes • Apply the Resolu
PAGE 778
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Send Destination Link Settings Enabled No Yes  Enable Send Destination Link as Default Disabled No Yes  File Retention Period 4 Hour No Yes  Enable SSL Enabled No Yes  Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments(E-Mail) Unlimited No Yes No Yes No Yes • If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.
PAGE 779
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  File Name Settings  Default Settings for File Names U A – Yes Yes – Yes Yes Yes Yes • File Naming - Serial Number Disabled Yes Yes - Text Disabled Yes Yes - Sender Name Enabled Yes Yes - Date Enabled Yes Yes - Session Page Counter Disabled Yes Yes - Unique Identifier Disabled Yes Yes – Yes Yes Disabled Yes Yes  Pre-Set Registration – Yes Yes  Message Body Settings – Yes Yes Yes Yes •
PAGE 780
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Internet Fax Settings Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled No Yes • (Resolution) 200x100dpi No Yes • Half Tone Disabled No Yes No Yes Page ● Internet Fax Settings*1  Condition Settings  Resolution Setting  Initial File Format Setting • File Type TIFF-F No Yes • Compression Mode MH (G3) No Yes  Auto Wake Up Print Enabled No Yes  Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report O
PAGE 781
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Receive Settings U A No Yes  Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled No Yes  2-Sided Printing of Received Data Disabled No Yes No Yes  Set Address for Data Forwarding • Forwarding to – No Yes • Direct SMTP Disabled No Yes • Add Hostname or IP Address.
PAGE 782
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page  Server Settings  Receive Settings • Internet Fax Receive Enabled No Yes • POP3 Server – No Yes • Port Number 110 No Yes • POP Authentication Disabled No Yes • User Name – No Yes • Password – No Yes Disabled No Yes • POP3 Communication Timeout 60sec.
PAGE 783
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page Yes Yes 4-66 Yes Yes ● Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)  Fax Settings*1 –  Internet Fax Settings*2  Reception Start – Yes Yes  Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled Yes Yes  Forward Received Data – Yes Yes U A 8-76 *1 When a facsimile expansion kit is installed. *2 When an internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PAGE 784
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  File Name Setting • Preset of Character - Character 1, 2 – - File Naming U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes + No.1 Sender Name No Yes + No.2 Date & Time No Yes + No.3 None No Yes + No.4 None No Yes + No.5 None No Yes + No.6 None No Yes + No.7 None No Yes + If received from a contact registered in the address book, sender's name is changed to contact's name.
PAGE 785
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Setting of Result Notification Address at Storing * U A No Yes • Reception Notification Settings Disabled No Yes • Address of Notification Destination – No Yes • Direct Entry – No Yes Page 8-80 On a model that is not equipped with a local drive, the setting name is indicated as "Inbound Routing Settings".
PAGE 786
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items  Disable Text/Stamp functions for Reprinting Factory default setting U A Page Disabled No Yes 6-25 No Yes  Batch Print Settings • Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled No Yes • Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Enabled No Yes • Print Order Setting for the Batch Print/Multi-File Print Date (Dsc.
PAGE 787
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Document Output Options  Print U A No Yes No Yes • Copies Enabled No Yes • Printer Enabled No Yes • Scan Send Disabled No Yes • Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1 Disabled No Yes • Fax Send(Incl. PC-Fax)*2 Disabled No Yes • Scan to Local Drive Enabled No Yes No Yes  Scan Send • Copies Disabled No Yes • Printer Disabled No Yes • Scan Send Enabled No Yes • Internet Fax Send(Incl.
PAGE 788
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Sharp OSA Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page ● Device Control  Condition Settings  Sharp OSA version – No Yes  Cookie Setting* Not hold Cookie No Yes  Delete Cookie* – No Yes  Accept remote access request from application – No Yes  Application allowed to access – No Yes  Approve remote access request on operation panel – No Yes  Accept UI operation request f
PAGE 789
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items  Enable Quick Login Factory default setting U A Disabled No Yes No Yes  Device Account Mode Setting • Device Account Mode Disabled No Yes • Allow Login by Different User Disabled No Yes • Disable Home Edit Mode when in Device Account Mode Disabled No Yes – No Yes – No Yes  Settings for Using Authentication Information – No Yes  Store User Information Enabled No Yes • Store Password Enabled No Yes • Cache Period Unlimited
PAGE 790
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Allow Remote Scanner Using Before Login.
PAGE 791
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Common Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Yes Yes Page ● Common Settings  Paper Settings  Paper Tray Settings • Auto Switching of Tray Enabled Yes Yes • Display Paper Tray Settings when bypass tray detects paper.
PAGE 792
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page  Operation Settings  Condition Settings • Screen Display Settings - Enlarge Display Mode Disabled No Yes - Message Time Setting 6 sec. No Yes - Language Setting Varies depending on country and region No Yes - Default Display Setting Home Screen No Yes - Display Favorite Menus as Default Disabled No Yes - Display Action Panel as default.
PAGE 793
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page • Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled No Yes 2-111 • Disable Printing of Operation Manual from the Operation Panel Disabled No Yes 1-88 • Initial Original Count Setting All Invalid No Yes 1-126 Disabled No Yes No Yes  Preview Setting • Received Data Image Check Setting • Default List/Thumbnail Display • Fax/I-Fax Reception Data*4, *5 Thumbnail No Yes • File Retrieve of Main Folder/Quick File Fold
PAGE 794
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Easy Mode Settings U A Page No Yes 2-3 4-6 5-8 No Yes 2-3 4-6 5-9 No Yes B No Yes – • Display a Confirmation Message when Selecting "Detail" in Easy Modes  Favorite Key Setting Enabled –  Mode Key Display Setting • Modes to Display – No Yes • Display Mode Keys on Home Enabled No Yes No Yes No Yes Varies depending on country and region No Yes • Set Keyboard Priority Varies depending on country and reg
PAGE 795
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode 3 (Normal) No Yes • Total Setting for Finish Specify Finishing Position Based on Paper Selected.
PAGE 796
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Date Format U A No Yes - Current Setting – No Yes - Format Varies depending on country and region No Yes No Yes Page 8-85  Enable/Disable Settings • Authentication Settings - Disable Home Edit Mode when in Device Account Mode Disabled - Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program Disabled No Yes 2-139 - Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disable
PAGE 797
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting - Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program + Disable Registration/Delection of All Program Items Disabled - Disable Registration of Memory Box*4 All Invalid - Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search All Invalid - Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool Disabled - Disabling of Forwarding via Network Disabled U A Page No Yes No Yes No Yes 4-87 No Yes A No Yes 5-7 No Yes 4-67 No
PAGE 798
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A - Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Duplex Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*1, 2, 3 Enabled No Yes - Disabling of Tray Settings Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Finisher*7 Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Bypass-Tray Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Offset Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Stapler*7 Disabled No Yes - Disabling of Punch*8 Disabled No Yes - Dis
PAGE 799
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Beep Sound Settings (Common) – No Yes  Keys Touch Sound Middle No Yes  Beep of Invalid Input Middle No Yes  Reference Tone No Sound No Yes  Copy Complete Sound No Sound No Yes  Scan Complete Sound (Image Send) Middle No Yes  Powering Off Sound Middle No Yes – No Yes – No Yes Page  Sound Settings  Caution Sound Settings  Beep Sound Settings (Image Send) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11
PAGE 800
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Network Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes Page ● Network Settings  Quick Settings  Wireless Settings  Connection Type Wired Only  IPv4 Settings • DHCP Enabled No Yes • IPv4 Address – No Yes • Subnet Mask – No Yes • Default Gateway – No Yes No Yes  Network Name Settings • Device Name – No Yes • Domain Name – No Yes No Yes  DNS Settings • Pri
PAGE 801
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Enable SSL – No Yes • Connection Test – No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Public Folder / NAS Setting • public - Use of Storage Allowed • shared - Use of Storage Allowed • faxreceive - Use of Storage Allowed  Network Name Setting  Device Name – No Yes  Domain Name – No Yes  Comment – No Yes No Yes Wired Only No Yes – No Yes No Yes  Interface Se
PAGE 802
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A – No Yes - Primary Server – No Yes - Secondary Server – No Yes - Domain Name – No Yes - DNS Update Disabled No Yes No Yes • IPv6 Settings  IEEE802.1X Setting • IEEE802.
PAGE 803
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A – No Yes – No Yes - KDC Server – No Yes - Port Number 88 No Yes - Realm – No Yes – No Yes – No Yes - SNTP Disabled No Yes - SNTP Server – No Yes - Port Number 123 No Yes - Timeout 5 seconds No Yes - Synchronous Interval 6 hours No Yes - Synchronize Upon Start Disabled No Yes - Synchronize Now – No Yes – No Yes – No Yes - mDNS Enabled No Yes - Service Name Model Name (Ser
PAGE 804
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  SMB Settings U A No Yes • Use SMB1.0 Enabled No Yes • Use SMB2.0 Enabled No Yes • Use SMB2.1 Enabled No Yes • Use SMB3.
PAGE 805
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Device Registration Account – No Yes  User Name – No Yes  Password – No Yes  Status – No Yes  Registration in Active Directory – No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Page 1-61  Public Folder / NAS Setting  public • Use of Storage Allowed  shared • Use of Storage Allowed  faxreceive • Use of Storage Allowed  Proxy Setting  Proxy Setting Disabled No Yes  Pro
PAGE 806
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Security Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A – No Yes – No Yes No Yes Force Retention No Yes Disabled No Yes No Yes Page ● Security Settings  Password Change  Restrict Device Web Page Access Via Password 8-102  Condition Settings  Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job • Restrict Operation  Automatic Deletion of Suspended Print Jobs • Time until Suspended Print J
PAGE 807
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Enabled No Yes 631 No Yes Disabled No Yes 443 No Yes Enabled No Yes 50001 No Yes Enabled No Yes 52000 No Yes Enabled No Yes 5900 No Yes Enabled No Yes 161 No Yes • SMB Disabled No Yes • SMTP Enabled No Yes • WSD Enabled No Yes • Print Release Disabled No Yes 53000 No Yes No Yes Enabled No Yes 10080 No Yes Enabled No Yes 10443 No Yes No Yes • IPP - Port Number • I
PAGE 808
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Enabled No Yes 162 No Yes • Notify Job End Enabled No Yes • LDAP Enabled No Yes • LDAP-SSL Enabled No Yes • SMB Enabled No Yes • SNTP Disabled No Yes • mDNS Enabled No Yes • Tandem Output Send Enabled No Yes • Data Backup Send Enabled No Yes • Print Release Enabled No Yes • XMPP Disabled No Yes  Filter Setting Disabled No Yes  Filter Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes •
PAGE 809
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Client Port U A No Yes - HTTPS Enabled No Yes - FTPS Enabled No Yes - SMTP-SSL Enabled No Yes - POP3-SSL Enabled No Yes - LDAP-SSL Enabled No Yes - Verify Signature of Server Certificate of the Other Party Disabled No Yes - Use only TLS 1.
PAGE 810
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • IKEv1 Settings U A No No - Pre-Shared Key – No Yes - SA Lifetime (time) 28800 seconds No Yes - SA Lifetime (size) 28800KB No Yes - IKE Lifetime 30sec.
PAGE 811
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Font Style Standard No Yes • Camouflage Pattern Pattern 1 No Yes • Print Method Positive No Yes No Yes • Print Contents Setting • Pre-Set Word Enabled, DO NOT COPY No Yes • Pre-Set Disabled No Yes • Unit Serial Number Disabled No Yes • Account Job ID Disabled No Yes • Login Name/User Number Disabled No Yes • Control No.
PAGE 812
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Select the Job to Print A No Yes • Copy Enabled No Yes • Print Enabled No Yes • Prints(Doc.
PAGE 813
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Energy Save U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes Page ● Energy Save  Eco Setting  Eco Recommendation Function Display Disabled  Display Message When Extending Transition Time to Preheat/Auto Power Shut-Off Mode Disabled  Mode Setting Custom No Yes  Preheat Mode Setting 1min.
PAGE 814
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST System Control U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes – No Yes – No Yes No Yes 50000 No Yes • Delete Job Log – No Yes • View Job Log – No Yes  Data Import/Export (CSV Format) – No Yes  Storage Backup – No Yes  Device Cloning – No Yes  Address Book Forward* – No Yes  Filing Data Backup – No Yes No Yes Page ● System Control  Job Log  Job Log Operation • Job Log
PAGE 815
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Image Quality Adjustment U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page ● Image Quality Adjustment  Collective Adjustment  Registration Adjustment*1 – No Yes  Fusing Cleaning Mode*1 – No Yes  MC Cleaning Mode*1 – No Yes  Black Letter/Black Line Width Adjustment 0 No Yes  Black Streak Reduction Disabled No Yes  Display warning message for black streaks detection.
PAGE 816
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Scan Image Quality U A No Yes  RGB Adjust All 0 No Yes  Sharpness 3 (Normal) No Yes  Contrast 3 (Normal) No Yes – No Yes  Custom CMYK Simulation Profile – No Yes  Custom Input Profile – No Yes  Custom Output Profile – No Yes – No Yes  Auto Colour Calibration (for Copy) – No Yes  Auto Colour Calibration (for Print) – No Yes  Copy Calibration by Screen – No Yes  Printer Calibration
PAGE 817
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Initial Installation Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Page ● Initial Installation Settings  Condition Settings  Name – No Yes  Machine Code – No Yes  Machine Location – No Yes  Memo – No Yes No Yes  Clock Adjust  Current Date – No Yes  Specify Time Zone – No Yes  Date&Time Settings – No Yes  Synchronize with Internet Time Server Disabled No Yes  Da
PAGE 818
SETTING MODE►STATUS STATUS Status Machine Identification The Machine Identification displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location. Item Description [Update] key Updates the information displayed. Unit Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the machine. Name If [Name] is not set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the [Machine Identification] screen appears.
PAGE 819
SETTING MODE►STATUS Item Description Displays the current status of supplies. Supply Status If staples are installed, their status is displayed. Paper Input Tray Status Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine. [Reboot the MFP] key Displays the restart screen. (Administrator rights are required.) [Enter the Power Save Mode] key Displays the power save mode screen. (Administrator rights are required.) Total Count This function shows the page count in each mode.
PAGE 820
SETTING MODE►STATUS Firmware Version Shows the firmware version of the machine as a list. Power Reset The Power Reset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode. This function requires administrator rights. Item Description Reboot the MFP Reboots the machine. Tapping the [Execute] key opens the Restart screen, and then tapping the [Execute] key again restarts the machine. Enter the Power Save Mode Shifts the machine to power save mode.
PAGE 821
SETTING MODE►STATUS List for Administrator You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to. When using "Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)" in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), select "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Internet Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] → [2-Sided Printing of Received Data], enabling you to specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
PAGE 822
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM SETTINGS Printer Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Interface Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine. Hexadecimal Dump Mode This function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text.
PAGE 823
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Status Settings If you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (that is, if you print data using the MS-DOS system or if you print data using the PC that does not have the provided printer driver installed), set the detailed printing conditions. (However, the "Disable Blank Page Print" function will be effective even when the PCL printer driver is used.
PAGE 824
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Setup Items Description Fold*8, *9 Trimming Width Settings*10 • • Enabled Disabled • • • • • • Saddle Fold*8 Z-Fold*9 C-Fold*9 Accordion Fold*9 Double Fold*9 Half Fold*9 2.0 to 20.0 mm • • Quick File (Disabled) (Enabled) *1 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", A3, B4, and A4. (This function may not take effect with some print methods.) *2 Can be selected when 2-Up is selected.
PAGE 825
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS PostScript Settings When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format. This can only be enabled when the PS3 expansion kit is installed. Setup Items Settings Setting Screen Settings Configure image settings for PostScript.
PAGE 826
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Print Settings Select this option to use the E-mail printing. E-mail Print Set whether or not E-mail print is performed. POP3 Server Set the POP3 server used for E-mail. Port Number Set the port number of the E-mail server. POP Authentication Set this to perform POP authentication for E-mail. User Name Set the E-mail user name. Password Set the password used for E-mail. Check Interval Set the automatic e-mail check frequency (polling interval).
PAGE 827
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct Print Settings (Network Folder) Configure these settings if you will be printing files on a network folder by direct print. A list of available network folders is shown. To add a network folder, click the [Add] button and configure the settings. Registration of Network Folder Configure network folder settings. Name Set the name to be used for direct print. Folder Path Set the folder path that has the files.
PAGE 828
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Send Settings Scan Settings Default Address Default Address Setting A default address can be stored that makes it possible to transmit by simply pressing the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] key without specifying an address. If [Apply E-mail address of the user for login.] is selected, the E-mail address of the login user is set as the default destination.
PAGE 829
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Subject Name Settings Default Subject Set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the default subject for E-mail and Internet Fax transmission. Pre-Set Registration You can save a preset file name for transmitted files. Click the [Add] key and set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the file name. File Name Settings Default Subject File Naming You can select the information included in the name of scanned files.
PAGE 830
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Internet Fax Settings Settings related to the image send function (Internet fax, Direct SMTP, etc.) can be configured. Condition Settings Configures the default settings for Internet fax. Resolution Setting Apply the Resolution Set when Stored You can apply the resolution setting that was set when the file was saved to transmission of the file. Resolution Setting Set the resolution used for file transmission. Half Tone Enable half-tones.
PAGE 831
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Original Print on Transaction Report When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select one of the settings below. • Always Print • Print at Error • Do not Print This setting will not be effective if the next "Transaction Report Print Select Setting (page 8-71)" is set to "Do not Print".
PAGE 832
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Send Setting These settings are used to configure the settings for Internet fax. I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting The duration of time that the machine will wait for a reception report from the destination machine can be set by any number from 1 hour to 240 hours in increments of 1 minute.
PAGE 833
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy This setting specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected. Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) When Line is Busy The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
PAGE 834
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Receiving Date & Time Print Enable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position where the date and time is printed. When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date and time of reception is printed on the received image. When [Outside the Received Image] is selected, the received image is reduced and the date and time of reception is printed in the blank area that results.
PAGE 835
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting Allows or refuses a reception from specified addresses/domains. Item Settings Item Reception from the stored address/domain is not allowed. Allow Reception Reception from the stored address/domain is allowed. All Invalid All Invalid Add New Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the address/domain (maximum of 64 characters) and tap the [Store] key.
PAGE 836
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct SMTP Setting Port Number (Receive), Port Number (Send) Specify the port number used for transmission and reception by direct SMTP. Timeout Set the wait time until transmission or reception is cancelled when a response is not received from the server during direct SMTP transmission/reception. Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Internet Fax Settings These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PAGE 837
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings On a model that is not equipped with a local drive, the setting name is indicated as "Inbound Routing Settings”. Inbound Routing Settings The fax and Internet fax received data can be forwarded according to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them.
PAGE 838
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Sender Address Registration Stores new sender number or address to be used for inbound routing. List name Settings Address to be Entered Displays the entered sender number or address. Fax Number Enter a facsimile number to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears.
PAGE 839
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 Enable the [Inbound Routing] function. 2 Store the sender number or address. Tap the [Administration Settings] from the menu. Enable the [Inbound Routing] function from the setting screen. Tap the [Sender Number /Address Registration] from the menu. Enter the destination number or address that you wish to store. If you wish to forward all received data, you need not store the sender number and address separately. 3 Store a forwarding table.
PAGE 840
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings Settings for Local Drive Storing of Received Data An external account application can be added and controlled. Configure settings for saving received faxes to the local drive. Item Settings Auto Storing of Received Data in Local Drive Set whether received faxes are saved to the local drive. Specifying Data to be Stored Select which received faxes are saved. Select from line and Internet Fax.
PAGE 841
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Settings Paper Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper Weight These are used to control the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper. These settings apply to recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, coloured paper, and user type paper. You can select "60 - 89 g/m2" or "90 - 105 g/m2" ("16 - 23 lbs." or "23+ - 28 lbs."). This can only be set on the machine's operation panel.
PAGE 842
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Paper Type for Auto Paper Selection The paper types* that the Auto Paper Selection function will select can be specified. Select one of the following settings: • Plain 1 • Plain 2 • Recycled The Auto Paper Selection function will not select any paper types other than the paper types specified with this setting. * The paper type set for each paper tray by selecting [System Settings] in "Settings" → [Paper Tray Settings].
PAGE 843
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Tray Settings This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for the bypass tray). Disabling of Bypass-Tray This setting is used to prohibit the use of bypass tray, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Finisher This setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions.
PAGE 844
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Machine Identification Settings Enter a name or code to identify the machine. Clock Adjust Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock. Item Description Specify Time Zone If your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is behind GMT, select [-]. Next, specify the time difference between your region and GMT in hours and minutes. (Example: If your region is Japan, + 9 hours 00 minutes.
PAGE 845
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Date Format This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine. The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed. Item Description Current Setting The current time appears in the format set in Date Format. Format Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD). Separator Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
PAGE 846
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Sound Settings Configure machine notification sounds and their volume. Beep Sound Settings (Common) Keys Touch Sound Control the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off. Beep of Invalid Input Control the volume of the sound, or turn the sound off at an invalid setting, such as when a number that cannot be specified is entered.
PAGE 847
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Network Settings Quick Settings Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network. Wireless Settings Connection Type Use this setting to switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)]. Keep Wireless Access Point activated This can only be enabled when "Connection Type" is "Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)".
PAGE 848
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of the machine. Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask. Default Gateway Enter the default gateway address. Network Name Setting Device Name Enter a device name. Domain Name Enter the domain name. Comment Enter a comment. DNS Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.
PAGE 849
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS LDAP Settings Name Enter the address book name. Search Root Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas. LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. User Name Enter the account name for LDAP setting. Password Enter the password. Change Password To change the password, set .
PAGE 850
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Network Name Setting Device Name Enter a device name. Domain Name Enter the domain name. Comment Enter a comment. Interface Settings Select the general network settings. The TCP/IP information can be set. Connection Type Switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)], or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)] to suit the network connection status.
PAGE 851
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS DHCPv6 Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address. Manual Address / Prefix Length Enter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine. Default Gateway Enter the default gateway address. • If DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically.
PAGE 852
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS IEEE802.1X Setting IEEE802.1X can be used to authenticate a user to allow use of the machine. IEEE802.1X protocol defines port-based authentication for both wired and wireless networks. Use IEEE802.1X authentication to allow only authenticated devices to use network, and protect against network abuse by third parties. You can enable or disable IEEE802.1X authentication with this setting. The IEEE802.1X details can be set with Setting mode (Web version).
PAGE 853
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Services Settings Configure the general network settings. Configure the SMTP, Kerberos authentication, SNTP, mDNS, SNMP, and SMB settings. SMTP SMTP Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server. Port Number Enter a port number. The default setting is port 25. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.
PAGE 854
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Kerberos Kerberos Authentication Settings KDC Server Enter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server. Port Number Enter the port number of the Kerberos authentication server. The default setting is port 88. Realm Enter the Kerberos realm. SNTP SNTP Settings SNTP Set this option to use the SNTP protocol. SNTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server. Port Number Enter a port number. The default setting is port 123.
PAGE 855
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS TRAP Community Enter the community name to be used for the SNMP TRAP sent from the device. TRAP Target Address Enter the IP address of the destination computer for SNMP TRAP communication. SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv3 settings. User Name Enter the user name. Authentication Key Enter the authentication key. Privacy Key Enter the privacy key. Context Name Display the context name.
PAGE 856
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS WSD WSD Settings WSD Print Set this option to use WSD printing. Use Multicast Discovery Set this option to use multicast discovery. External Print Services Settings For Google Cloud Print Settings, see the "Cloud Connect Guide". For AirPrint Settings, see the "AirPrint Guide". LDAP Settings The following explains the LDAP settings. When you tap the [Store] key, the LDAP settings are updated with your entries. The default address book is set to .
PAGE 857
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Setup Items Setting Password Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to Authentication Type Select the authentication server from the drop-down list. Bind Prefix Set the Bind prefix. The default setting is "uid". Server Usage Set the server application. Set the address book and user authentication. Applicable Destination Type Select the applicable destination type from E-mail Address, Fax Number, and Internet Fax.
PAGE 858
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Proxy Setting Access the network through a proxy server. Settings Item Description Proxy Setting Set whether proxy settings are used. Proxy Server Address Enter the proxy server address. User Name Enter a user name to access the proxy server. Password Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server. Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
PAGE 859
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Show Wireless Setting Screen Click the [Setup] button. In the Wireless Setting screen, you can configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key. Initialize Wireless Settings Click the [Initialize] button. The settings for SSID, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key are initialized.
PAGE 860
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Wireless Setting screen (Infrastructure Mode) If [Connection Type] is set to [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)] and the [Setup] button is clicked, the infrastructure mode wireless setting screen is displayed. Configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings. Access Point Search Click this to search access points. When the search results are displayed, select the access point to use and click [OK].
PAGE 861
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Web Page Setting The following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version). HTTP Access Settings Number of Users who can Log-in at the Same Time Enter a number of users who can access Setting mode (Web version) simultaneously. Auto Logout Time Enter a time to automatically log out when no communication continues with the machine. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted.
PAGE 862
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Security Settings When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)". Password Change Restrict Device Web Page Access Via Password Use this setting to display the login screen and require login in order to access the Web server. Change Password The administrator password can be changed. When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password.
PAGE 863
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Condition Settings Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job You can select settings to cancel print jobs that are not print hold jobs, or force all print jobs to be held. When [Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job] is turned ON, the settings below can be selected. Item Settings Force Retention This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected.
PAGE 864
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Port Control Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Store] key. The following ports can be configured.
PAGE 865
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Intrusion/Attack Detection Intrusion/Attack Detection If the same IP address is accessed more than the specified number of times during a certain period, access from that IP address is prohibited. In addition, IP addresses for which access is prohibited are managed as a reception refusal list, and the reception refusal status is released (deleted) with administrator authority.
PAGE 866
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Client Port • HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication. • FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication. • SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP communication. • POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3 communication. • LDAP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to LDAP communication. • syslog-SSL: Apply SSL encryption when sending the Audit Log. • Verify Signature of Server Certificate of the Other Party: Check the certificate of the communication destination server.
PAGE 867
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Encryption Settings Sign E-mail Enable "Sign E-mail" to use a signature. Encrypt Enable encryption. Disable sending to the addresses which cannot be encrypted. Prohibit transmission to addresses that cannot be encrypted. Certificate Information When a device certificate is installed, click the [Show] key to display the certificate information.
PAGE 868
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Client Address Set the destination IP address type and port number (for IPv6, set the port number / prefix length). Protocol Set the protocol to be used. Filter Mode Set the filter to be used for IPsec. IPsec Encryption Configure settings for the authentication method used for IPsec. ESP Select to use ESP authentication. Allow Communication not using ESP Specify whether or not communication that does not use ESP is allowed. AH Select to use AH authentication.
PAGE 869
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Document Administration Function All of the transmitted image data (sent or received by facsimile or e-mail transfer) can be forwarded to any destination. List name Settings Forwarding Destination Settings (Send Data) Forward Send Data Set a destination to forward the send data. E-mail/Network Folder/FTP/Desktop Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book. You can enter an e-mail directly.
PAGE 870
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Hidden Pattern Print Setting Select Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The hidden pattern print function is effective at preventing unauthorised copying as the specified text emerges in the background on output sheets. Initial Status Settings Default Settings Item Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting A pattern print can be printed with this settings. Print Colour Select a print colour. Exposure Select an exposure. Font Size Select a font size.
PAGE 871
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Tracking Information Print Prints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed. Item Settings Tracking Information Print Setting Set this option to print the tracking information. Print Information The following information can be printed. • Serial number, characters, account job ID, login name/user number, date and time Select the Print Colour Select a print colour. Position Set a print position on each page.
PAGE 872
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Audit Log Specification When the storing destination of the audit log is specified as an external server, the audit log is saved in the prepared buffer inside the internal storage temporarily until the sending to the external server is completed successfully. • After the sending to the external server is completed successfully, the audit log in the buffer will be deleted.
PAGE 873
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Event name Date and time*1 Operation I/F*2 Login name Result *3 Comm Failure *The communication counterpart is except for the audit server.
PAGE 874
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Certificate Management Device Certificate Management Import Import the certificate/private key. Export Export the certificate/private key. Certificate Information Shows the status of the certificate. Creation of Certificate and Private Key Common Name (Required) Enter the name to be used. Organization Enter the name of the organization. Organizational Unit Enter the name of the unit within the organization. City/Locality Enter the city or locality.
PAGE 875
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) Common Name (Required) Enter the name to be used. Organization Enter the name of the organization. Organizational Unit Enter the name of the unit within the organization. City/Locality Enter the city or locality. State/Province Enter the state or province. Country/Region (Required) Enter the country code. Sender Address Enter the sender's E-mail address. Certificate Start Date Enter the start date and time for the certificate.
PAGE 876
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS System Control Job Log Job Log Operation Deletes or stores log of a job executed on the machine. Set the number of jobs for [The Number of Job Log to Notify by E-mail] and click [Store]. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log. You can save the job log by selecting the [Job Log] in Setting mode (Web version). View Job Log Views log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key.
PAGE 877
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Cloning Saves the machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines. To use the machine to manipulate a file, first insert the USB memory device in the machine. If you need to select settings on the Web page, use your computer to manipulate the file. Export Exports data. Import Imports data into the machine.
PAGE 878
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Storing/Calling of System Settings You can reset the current Setting mode settings to the previously stored settings or to the factory default settings. Store Current Configuration Stores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory. The stored settings will be retained even if the [Power] button is turned off. To retrieve the stored settings, use "Restore Configuration" below.
PAGE 879
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Alert and Status Status Message Selects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address. Standard Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.
PAGE 880
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SMTP Settings Use SMTP Server in [Network Settings]. Set the SMTP server settings used for e-mail status and E-mail alert to the same settings as SMTP setting (page 8-88) of network setting. SMTP Settings Use this setting when not using "Use SMTP Server in [Network Settings].". Primary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server. Port Number Enter a port number.
PAGE 881
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Quality Adjustment • Registration Adjustment or Fusing Cleaning Mode (including "MC Cleaning Mode") in [Collective Adjustment], all Common Functions, and removal of a toner cartridge can only be executed in setting mode on the machine. • Colour Profile Settings can only be configured on the Web page. Collective Adjustment Various devices mounted on the machine can be set.
PAGE 882
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Dark Streak Reduction Specify to use the dark streak reduction or not. The dark streak reduction can be used for Scan Original, Copy, Image Send, and Scan to Local Drive functions. If the dark streak reduction is enabled, select any of the following options. • Treat Thin Dark Streaks: Use this setting to make thin dark streaks less apparent. (Low level) • Normal: Use this setting to make dark streaks less apparent.
PAGE 883
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Print Image Quality Quick Image Quality Adjustment (Colour / B/W) Perform quick adjustment of print quality. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. Colour Balance (Colour / B/W) You can adjust the tone and density of colour in colour printing and black & white printing. You can adjust the default colour, gradation, and density of colour copies and black & white copies.
PAGE 884
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Colour Profile Settings Set colour profiles used for printing. Custom CMYK Simulation Profile Current Profile Name This shows the currently set profile name. Backup to PC Save the current colour profile on the computer. Profile Update Select the updated colour profile and click the [Store] key. Custom Input Profile Current Profile Name This shows the currently set profile name. Backup to PC Save the current colour profile on the computer.
PAGE 885
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Functions Auto Colour Calibration (for Copy) Auto Colour Calibration (for Print) Copy Calibration by Screen Printer Calibration by Screen Performs automatic colour correction when the colour is off. For copying, adjust with [Auto Colour Calibration (for Copy)]. For printing, adjust with [Auto Colour Calibration (for Print)]. You can use [Copy Calibration by Screen] and [Printer Calibration by Screen] to perform even higher precision adjustment of each mode.
PAGE 886
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Installation Settings This groups together the items that were set initially when the machine was installed. The initial installation setting items are the same as the regular setting items that have the same name. For information on a setting item, see the explanation of the regular item.
PAGE 887
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE FOR FAX SETTING MODE FOR FAX The following lists the Setting mode for fax and factory default settings. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
PAGE 888
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page • ECM Enabled No Yes 4-54 • Digital Line Network Disabled No Yes 4-5 • Distinctive Ring Detection*1 Off No Yes 4-55 • PBX Setting*1 Disabled No Yes 4-8 • Auto Reduction Sending Setting Enabled No Yes 4-26 • Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled No Yes 4-25 • Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled No Yes • Default Own Number Sending Enabled No Yes • Sender Destination Name Switch Fax N
PAGE 889
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Setup Items Factory default setting - Allow/Reject Number Setting + Allow/Reject Number Setting All Invalid  Fax Polling Security U A No Yes No Yes No Yes • Add New – No Yes • Set Fax Polling Security Enabled No Yes – Yes Yes • Box Type All Boxes Yes Yes • Display Items 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes  F-Code Memory Box Page 4-60 4-86 4-90 ● Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)  Fax Settings  Receive Settings Auto Reception Yes Yes  Multiple
PAGE 890
LICENSE INFORMATION Information on the Software License for This Product Software composition The software included in this product is comprised of various software components whose individual copyrights are held by SHARP or by third parties.
PAGE 891
Copyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
PAGE 892
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 893
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version orderivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] D3DES License --------------- Copyright (c) 1988,1989,1990,1991,1992 by Richard Outerbridge. (GEnie : OUTER; CIS : [71755,204]) Graven Imagery, 1992. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
PAGE 894
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
PAGE 895
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
PAGE 896
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
PAGE 897
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.
PAGE 898
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs.
PAGE 899
library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
PAGE 900
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0.
PAGE 901
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
PAGE 902
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
PAGE 903
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
PAGE 904
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
PAGE 905
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
PAGE 906
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works.
PAGE 907
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy.
PAGE 908
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
PAGE 909
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
PAGE 910
Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
PAGE 911
relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
PAGE 912
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
PAGE 913
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14.
PAGE 914
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program.
PAGE 915
---------------------------------------------------------------------------libtiff--------------------------------------------------------------------------Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
PAGE 916
SOFTWARE LICENSE PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. 1. License The application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this License, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the "Software") and related documentation are licensed to you by SHARP.
PAGE 917
6. Limited Warranty on Media. SHARP warrants the disks on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. The entire liability of SHARP and/or its Licensors and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the disk which fails to meet the limited warranty provided by this Clause 6.
PAGE 918
2020C-EX1